Lexus OM50E88U

User Manual: Lexus 2016 Lexus LS 460 Owners Manual Pdf | Owner's Manual Pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 438

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

QUICK GUIDE

BASIC FUNCTION

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

137

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

297

INFORMATION

313

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

317

PHONE

343

LEXUS ENFORM

381

12.3-INCH DISPLAY

409

INDEX

417

About the following equipment, see the “Owner’s Manual”.
 Air conditioning
 Fuel consumption
 Energy monitor (LS600hL)
 Vehicle customization settings
 Lexus night view

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Introduction
NAVIGATION AND MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL
This manual explains the operation of the system. Please read this manual carefully to
ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle at all times.
The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the system differ depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed and the map data available at
the time of producing this document.
In some situations when changing between screens, it may take longer than normal for
the screen to change, the screen may be blank momentarily or noise may be displayed.
Please be aware that the content of this manual may be different from the system in
some cases, such as when the system’s software is updated.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM (WITH NAVIGATION FUNCTION)
The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accessories ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the Global Positioning
System (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using these signals and
other vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locating
a desired destination.
The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present starting
location to your destination. The system is also designed to direct you to a destination
that is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses DENSO maps. The calculated routes may not be the shortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own personal local knowledge or “short cut” may at times be faster than the calculated routes.
The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allow you to
easily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destination is not in the database, you can enter the street address or a major intersection close to it and the system will guide you there.
The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructions
will announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in when approaching an
intersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your eyes on the road and are
timed to provide enough time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down.
Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations that
may affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehicle’s position depends on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances. For more information on the limitations of the system, refer to page 132.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attention with the
following marks.
CAUTION
●This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of
injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE
●This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment
if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to
avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do not do
this” or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pressing, turning, etc.)
used to operate switches and other devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.
a lid opens).

LS460_600h_Navi_U

HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL

No.

Name

Description

Operational
Outlines

An outline of the operation is explained.

Main Operations

The steps of an operation are explained.

Related Operations

A main operation’s supplementary operations are described.

Information

Useful information for the user is described.

■ INFORMATION FOR HYBRID VEHICLES IS WRITTEN IN BRACKETS
NEXT TO THE INFORMATION FOR GASOLINE VEHICLES
Different writing styles for gasoline and hybrid vehicles
Example
When the engine*1 *2 switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON*1 *2 mode, the initial screen will be displayed and the system will begin
operating.
*1: Vehicles with gasoline engine
*2: Vehicles with hybrid system

LS460_600h_Navi_U

SAFETY INSTRUCTION (WITH
NAVIGATION FUNCTION)
To use this system in the safest possible
manner, follow all the safety tips shown below.
This system is intended to assist in reaching
the destination and, if used properly, can do
so. The driver is solely responsible for the
safe operation of your vehicle and the safety
of your passengers.
Do not use any feature of this system to the
extent it becomes a distraction and prevents safe driving. The first priority while
driving should always be the safe operation
of the vehicle. While driving, be sure to observe all traffic regulations.
Prior to the actual use of this system, learn
how to use it and become thoroughly familiar with it. Read the entire manual to make
sure you understand the system. Do not allow other people to use this system until
they have read and understood the instructions in this manual.
For your safety, some functions may become inoperable when driving. Unavailable
screen buttons are dimmed. Only when the
vehicle is not moving, can the destination
and route selection be done.

While driving, listen to the voice instructions
as much as possible and glance at the
screen briefly and only when it is safe. However, do not totally rely on voice guidance.
Use it just for reference. If the system cannot determine the current position correctly, there is a possibility of incorrect, late, or
non-voice guidance.
The data in the system may occasionally be
incomplete. Road conditions, including
driving restrictions (no left turns, street closures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore,
before following any instructions from the
system, look to see whether the instruction
can be done safely and legally.
This system cannot warn about such things
as the safety of an area, condition of streets,
and availability of emergency services. If unsure about the safety of an area, do not drive
into it. Under no circumstances is this system a substitute for the driver’s personal
judgement.
Use this system only in locations where it is
legal to do so. Some states/provinces may
have laws prohibiting the use of video and
navigation screens next to the driver.

CAUTION
●For safety, the driver should not operate
the navigation system while he/she is
driving. Insufficient attention to the road
and traffic may cause an accident.
●While driving, be sure to obey the traffic
regulations and maintain awareness of
the road conditions. If a traffic sign on the
road has been changed, route guidance
may not have the updated information
such as the direction of a one way street.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

SAFETY INSTRUCTION
(WITHOUT NAVIGATION
FUNCTION)
To use this system in the safest possible
manner, follow all the safety tips shown below.
Do not use any feature of this system to the
extent it becomes a distraction and prevents safe driving. The first priority while
driving should always be the safe operation
of the vehicle. While driving, be sure to observe all traffic regulations.
Prior to the actual use of this system, learn
how to use it and become thoroughly familiar with it. Read the entire manual to make
sure you understand the system. Do not allow other people to use this system until
they have read and understood the instructions in this manual.
For your safety, some functions may become inoperable when driving. Unavailable
screen buttons are dimmed.
CAUTION
●For safety, the driver should not operate
the navigation system while he/she is
driving. Insufficient attention to the road
and traffic may cause an accident.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1

QUICK GUIDE

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1. BASIC FUNCTION......................................... 12

1. BASIC OPERATION..................................... 72

Remote Touch........................................................... 12
“Menu” SCREEN .................................................... 14

QUICK REFERENCE..........................................72
MAP SCREEN OPERATION ........................ 75
MAP SCREEN INFORMATION..................80
TRAFFIC INFORMATION ..............................85

2. QUICK REFERENCE................................... 18
“Setup” SCREEN..................................................... 18
“Information” SCREEN........................................20

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION .................. 22
REGISTERING HOME...................................... 22
REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS ................................................23
OPERATION FLOW:
GUIDING THE ROUTE.................................24
SETTING HOME AS
THE DESTINATION ........................................25

2. DESTINATION SEARCH...........................88
DESTINATION SEARCH
OPERATION ......................................................88
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ............. 100

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE................................. 105
ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN .................. 105
TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE
PROMPTS...............................................................111
EDITING ROUTE ................................................. 112

4. FUNCTION INDEX...................................... 26

4. MEMORY POINTS......................................116

FUNCTION INDEX ............................................26

MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS .................... 116

BASIC FUNCTION

1. BASIC INFORMATION
BEFORE OPERATION ............................30
INITIAL SCREEN ..................................................30
HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch .............32
ENTERING LETTERS AND
NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN
OPERATION.......................................................34
SCREEN ADJUSTMENT .................................. 37

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS................................. 39
REGISTERING/CONNECTING
Bluetooth® DEVICE.........................................39
SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS .....................45

3. OTHER SETTINGS ....................................... 56
GENERAL SETTINGS .......................................56
VOICE SETTINGS ...............................................63
VEHICLE SETTINGS ..........................................65

LS460_600h_Navi_U

5. SETUP...............................................................126
DETAILED NAVIGATION
SETTINGS............................................................126
TRAFFIC SETTINGS ......................................... 130

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM ....................................................... 132
GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING
SYSTEM) ..............................................................132
MAP DATABASE VERSION AND
COVERED AREA .......................................... 135

DVD (DVD VIDEO AND
AVCHD DISC).............................................235 1
Blu-ray Disc
(BD-Video AND BDAV)............................. 242
USB MEMORY...................................................250 2
iPod............................................................................253
Bluetooth® AUDIO...........................................256
3
SD CARD...............................................................259
EXTERNAL DEVICES ......................................271

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

1. BASIC OPERATION ...................................140
QUICK REFERENCE .......................................140
SOME BASICS..................................................... 142

2. RADIO OPERATION ................................. 151
AM/FM RADIO................................................................151
XM Satellite Radio .................................................161
INTERNET RADIO............................................. 167

3. MEDIA OPERATION ................................168
CD...............................................................................168
DVD..............................................................................171
USB MEMORY .................................................... 176
iPod.............................................................................180
Bluetooth® AUDIO ............................................184
AUX ...........................................................................189

4. AUDIO/VISUAL
REMOTE CONTROLS...........................193
STEERING SWITCHES....................................193
REAR SEAT AUDIO CONTROLS ............196

9. SETUP FOR REAR SEAT
4
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM...............272
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM SETTINGS ..................................... 272

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM....................................................... 275 6
OPERATING INFORMATION ................. 275

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM..................298
CASUAL SPEECH
RECOGNIZATION .....................................305
COMMAND LIST .............................................306

AUDIO SETTINGS.............................................199

OPERATING INFORMATION................. 204

7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM FEATURES ............................... 216
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM FEATURES...................................... 216
SOME BASICS..................................................... 219

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM OPERATION..........................228
AM/FM/SAT RADIO...................................... 228
CD..............................................................................229
VIDEO CD.............................................................232

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
8
OPERATION.............................................298

5. SETUP .............................................................. 199
6. TIPS FOR OPERATING
THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM .........204

10
2. MOBILE ASSISTANT
OPERATION............................................... 311
MOBILE ASSISTANT .........................................311

INFORMATION

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY .......................314
RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER
INFORMATION.............................................. 314
DATA SERVICES SETTINGS....................... 316

LS460_600h_Navi_U

TABLE OF CONTENTS
7

PERIPHERAL MONITORING
SYSTEM

LEXUS ENFORM

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW.............382
1. LEXUS PARKING
ASSIST MONITOR.................................. 318
LEXUS PARKING
ASSIST MONITOR.........................................318
ESTIMATED COURSE LINE
DISPLAY MODE............................................323
PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE
DISPLAY MODE............................................325
LEXUS PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR PRECAUTIONS ...................327
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ............332

FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW.......................382
TYPE A: FUNCTION
ACHIEVED BY
USING A CELLULAR PHONE..............384
TYPE B: FUNCTION
ACHIEVED BY
USING DCM AND
THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM.................388
TYPE C: FUNCTION
ACHIEVED BY USING DCM ..................391

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION.......... 392

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST............... 334

LEXUS Enform Remote................................... 392
LEXUS Enform Service Connect ............... 393
LEXUS App Suite ............................................... 394
LEXUS Enform Destinations .........................400
Lexus Insider..........................................................403

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST ....................334
INTUITIVE PARKING
ASSIST SETTING............................................. 341

PHONE

1. PHONE OPERATION
(HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR
CELLULAR PHONES) .......................... 344
QUICK REFERENCE ......................................344
SOME BASICS....................................................345
CALLING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ...............................................................349
RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE .............................................................. 355
TALKING ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ...............................................................356
Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE
FUNCTION.......................................................359

2. SETUP............................................................. 364
PHONE SETTINGS ..........................................364

3. WHAT TO DO IF... ..................................... 375
TROUBLESHOOTING..................................375

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. SETUP............................................................. 406
LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS ......................406

12.3-INCH DISPLAY

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY
OPERATION ............................................. 410
12.3-INCH DISPLAY-OVERVIEW........... 410
USING “Side Display” ........................................412

INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX............................... 418

1
1

QUICK GUIDE
2

BASIC FUNCTION

1. Remote Touch ............................................... 12
2. “Menu” SCREEN......................................... 14

STATUS DISPLAY...................................................... 16

2 QUICK REFERENCE
1. “Setup” SCREEN ......................................... 18
2. “Information” SCREEN............................. 20

3 NAVIGATION OPERATION

1. REGISTERING HOME............................ 22
2. REGISTERING PRESET
9
DESTINATIONS...................................... 23
3. OPERATION FLOW:
10
GUIDING THE ROUTE........................ 24
4. SETTING HOME AS
THE DESTINATION............................... 25

4 FUNCTION INDEX
1. FUNCTION INDEX .................................. 26

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC FUNCTION

1. Remote Touch
*1

*1: With navigation function
*2: Without navigation function

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC FUNCTION

No.

Name

Page

“MAP” button

Press to display the current position, cancel the
screen scroll, start guidance, and repeat a voice
guidance.

72, 75

“ · ” button

Press to scroll the list screen and to change the
scale of the map*.

32, 35, 76

Back button

Press to display the previous screen.

“MENU” button

Press to display the “Menu” screen.

Remote Touch
knob

Move in the desired direction to select a function,
letter and screen button.
Press to enter the selected function, letter or
screen button.

“ENTER” button

Press to enter the selected function, letter or
screen button.

“HOME” button

Press to display the compass mode screen.



1
QUICK GUIDE

Function

*: With navigation function

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC FUNCTION

2. “Menu” SCREEN
The “Menu” screen can be reached by the following methods:
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC FUNCTION

No.

Select to display the “Destination” screen.

Page

88
QUICK GUIDE

Function

Select to display the radio control screen.
140
Select to display the media control screen.

*1, 2

Select to display the hands-free operation screen.

344

Select to display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.

394

Select to display the “Information” screen.

Select to display the air conditioning control screen.

“Owner’s
Manual”

Select to display the “Setup” screen.

Select to adjust the contrast and brightness of the screens, turn the
screen off, etc.

*1: With navigation function
*2: This function is not made available on some models.
INFORMATION

●When the split-screen display is selected, the “Menu” screen will be displayed on the “Main
Display”. (P. 410)

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC FUNCTION

STATUS DISPLAY
The condition of the Bluetooth® connection, as well as the level of reception and the
amount of cellular phone battery charge left, are displayed on the status bar. This status
bar is shown on all modes.

No.

Indicators

Conditions

(Gray)

The condition of
the Bluetooth®
connection

LS460_600h_Navi_U

(Blue)

No connection
Poor
Good
®
 An antenna for the Bluetooth connection is built into the instrument panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® connection may
deteriorate and the system may not function when a Bluetooth®
phone is used in the following conditions and/or places:
The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as when
it is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box).
The cellular phone is touching or is covered with metal materials.
 Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place where the condition of the
Bluetooth® connection is good.

1. BASIC FUNCTION

No.

Indicators

The amount of
battery charge
left

Poor
Excellent
 The level of reception does not always correspond with the level
displayed on the cellular phone. The level of reception may not be
displayed depending on the phone you have.
When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place
inaccessible by radio waves, “No Service” is displayed.
 “Rm” is displayed when receiving in a roaming area. While roaming, display “Rm” top-left on the icon.
 The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the type of
phone you have.

Empty
Full
 The amount displayed does not always correspond with the
amount displayed on the Bluetooth® device.
The amount of battery charge left may not be displayed depending
on the type of the Bluetooth® device connected.
This system does not have a charging function.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

QUICK GUIDE

The level of reception

Conditions

2. QUICK REFERENCE

1. “Setup” SCREEN
The “Setup” screen can be reached by the following methods:
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Setup”.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. QUICK REFERENCE

No.

Page

Select to change the selected language, operation sound, automatic
screen change settings, etc.

Select to set the voice guidance settings.

Select to set Bluetooth® phones and Bluetooth® audio devices.

Select to set radio and external media settings.

199

Select to set traffic information.

130

Select to set memory points (home, preset destinations, address book
entries, areas to avoid), navigation details or to delete previous destinations.

1
QUICK GUIDE

*1, 2

Function

116, 126

Select to set vehicle information such as maintenance information.

Select to set the phone sound, contacts, message settings, etc.

364

*1, 2

Select to set LEXUS App Suite settings.

406

Select to set data services settings.

316

*1: With navigation function
*2: This function is not made available on some models.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. QUICK REFERENCE

2. “Information” SCREEN
The “Information” screen can be reached by the following methods:
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Info”.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. QUICK REFERENCE

No.

Function

“Owner’s
Manual”

*1, 2

Select to display traffic information.

Select to display weather information.

314

*1, 2

Select to display the “LEXUS Insider” screen.

403

*1, 2

Select to display the vehicle alert history.

QUICK GUIDE

Select to display the energy monitor or fuel consumption screen.

Page



*1: With navigation function
*2: This function is not made available on some models.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

1. REGISTERING HOME*
1

Press the “MAP” button on the
Remote Touch.

Select “Dest.”.

Select “Go Home”.

Select “Yes”.

There are different kinds of methods to search for your home.
(P. 88)

Select “Enter”.

Select “OK”.
Registration of home is complete.
Registering home in a different way
P. 117
Editing the name, location, phone number and icon
P. 117
Setting home as the destination
P. 90
7

*: With navigation function
22

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

2. REGISTERING PRESET DESTINATIONS*
Press the “MAP” button on the
Remote Touch.

Select “Dest.”.

Select one of the preset destination
buttons.

Select “Yes”.

There are different kinds of methods to search for a destination.
(P. 88)

Select “Enter”.

1
QUICK GUIDE

Select “OK”.
Registration of preset destinations is complete.
Registering preset destinations in a different way
P. 118
Editing the name, location, phone number and icon
P. 119
Setting preset destinations as the destination
P. 90
7

*: With navigation function
23

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

3. OPERATION FLOW: GUIDING THE ROUTE*
1

Press the “MAP” button on the
Remote Touch.

Select “Dest.”.

There are different kinds of methods to search for a destination.
(P. 88)

Select “Go”.

5 Select “OK”.
Selecting routes other than the one recommended (P. 101)
Guidance to the destination is displayed
on the screen and can be heard via voice
guidance.

*: With navigation function
24

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. NAVIGATION OPERATION

4. SETTING HOME AS THE DESTINATION*
Press the “MAP” button on the
Remote Touch.

Select “Dest.”.

Select “Go Home”.

1
QUICK GUIDE

Select “OK”.
Selecting routes other than the one recommended (P. 101)
Guidance to the destination is displayed
on the screen and can be heard via voice
guidance.
4

*: With navigation function
25

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4. FUNCTION INDEX

1. FUNCTION INDEX
Map*
Displaying maps

Page

Viewing the map screen

Displaying the current position

Viewing the current position vicinity map

Changing the scale

Changing the map orientation

Displaying map Information

Displaying the estimated travel/arrival time to the destination

105

Selecting the map mode

Displaying traffic information

Searching for destinations

Page

Searching for the destination

Changing the search area

Route guidance*
Before starting or during route guidance

Page

Starting route guidance

100

Editing the route

112

Viewing the entire route map

107

Adjusting route guidance volume

Deleting the destination

113
Address book

Page

Registering address book entries

120

Marking icons on the map

121

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4. FUNCTION INDEX

Useful functions
Information

Hands-free system (for cellular phone)

66
Page

Registering/connecting a Bluetooth® phone

Making a call on a Bluetooth® phone

349

Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® phone

355

Voice command system
Operating the system with your voice
Peripheral monitoring system
Viewing behind the rear of the vehicle

QUICK GUIDE

Displaying vehicle maintenance*

Page

Page
298
Page
318

*: With navigation function

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2
1

BASIC FUNCTION
2

BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE
OPERATION

2 Bluetooth® SETTINGS

1. INITIAL SCREEN ....................................... 30

1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING
Bluetooth® DEVICE............................... 39 4

2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch...... 32

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® PHONE
FOR THE FIRST TIME ......................................... 39

3. ENTERING LETTERS AND
NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN
OPERATION............................................ 34

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® AUDIO
PLAYER FOR THE FIRST TIME ....................... 41
PROFILES ...................................................................... 43

ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS........ 34

2. SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS ............ 45

LIST SCREEN.............................................................. 35

“Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN................................ 45

4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT ........................ 37

REGISTERING A Bluetooth® DEVICE .......... 46

DELETING A Bluetooth DEVICE.................. 48
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE...................................................................... 48

EDITING THE Bluetooth DEVICE
INFORMATION.................................................... 50
“System Settings” SCREEN .................................. 52

3 OTHER SETTINGS
1. GENERAL SETTINGS.............................. 56
GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN ...................... 56

2. VOICE SETTINGS..................................... 63
VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN.............................. 63

3. VEHICLE SETTINGS ................................ 65
MAINTENANCE....................................................... 66

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

1. INITIAL SCREEN
1 When the engine switch is

turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode, the initial screen will
be displayed and the system will begin
operating.

 Images shown on the initial screen can be
changed to suit individual preferences.
(P. 59)
 After a few seconds, the “CAUTION”
screen will be displayed. Waiting about 5
seconds or selecting “Continue” switches
to the last displayed screen. (Press any button on the Remote Touch, the function’s
corresponding screen will be displayed.)

CAUTION
●When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running , always apply the parking brake for
safety.

MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION*
This system reminds users when to replace certain parts or components and
shows dealer information (if registered)
on the screen.
When the vehicle reaches a previously
set driving distance or date specified for
a scheduled maintenance check, the
“Maintenance Reminder” screen will be
displayed when the system is turned on.
 This screen goes off if the screen is not
operated for several seconds.
 To prevent this screen from being displayed again, select “Do Not Display
This Message Again”.
 To register maintenance information:
P. 66
 If
is selected, the registered phone
number can be called.

*: With navigation function
30

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

RESTARTING THE SYSTEM
When system response is extremely
slow, the system can be restarted.

2
BASIC FUNCTION

1 Press and hold the “PWR•VOL” knob
for 3 seconds or more.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

2. HOW TO USE THE Remote Touch
This system can be operated by the
Remote Touch when the engine
switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode.

1 Use the Remote Touch knob to select
the desired button on the screen.

 When the pointer moves close to a button,
it will be automatically pulled onto that button. The strength of this pull can be
adjusted. (P. 56)
 The pointer will disappear from the screen
if it is not moved for 6 seconds. Operation
of the Remote Touch knob will cause the
pointer to reappear.
 “ ” and “ ” buttons on the Remote Touch
can be used to scroll up and down on list
screens.
With navigation function: Press the “ ” button on the Remote Touch to zoom in on the
map screen and the “ ” button to zoom
out.
 When

2 To select a screen button, press the

Remote Touch knob or an “ENTER”
button. Once a button has been selected, the screen will change.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

is displayed on the screen,

select
or press the
button on
the Remote Touch to return to the previous
screen.
 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote
Touch to display the “Menu” screen. (P.
14)
 With navigation function: The map screen
can be displayed by pressing the “MAP”
button on the Remote Touch. (P. 75)
Without navigation function: The compass
screen can be displayed by pressing the
“HOME” button on the Remote Touch.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

CAUTION
●Do not allow fingers, fingernails or hair to
become caught in the Remote Touch as
this may cause an injury.
●Be careful when touching the Remote
Touch in extreme temperatures as it may
become very hot or cold due to the temperature inside the vehicle.

2
BASIC FUNCTION

NOTICE
●Do not allow the Remote Touch to come
into contact with food, liquid, stickers or lit
cigarettes as doing so may cause it to
change color, emit a strange odor or stop
functioning.
●Do not subject the Remote Touch to
excessive pressure or strong impact as
the knob may bend or break off.
●Do not allow coins, contact lenses or
other such items to become caught in the
Remote Touch as this may cause it to stop
functioning.
●Items of clothing may rip if they become
caught on the Remote Touch knob.
●If your hand or any object is on the
Remote Touch knob when the engine
switch is in ACCESSORY
mode, the Remote Touch knob may not
operate properly.
INFORMATION

●Under extremely cold conditions, the
Remote Touch knob may react slowly.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

3. ENTERING LETTERS AND NUMBERS/LIST SCREEN OPERATION
When searching by an address, name,
etc., or entering data, letters and numbers can be entered via the screen.

ENTERING LETTERS AND
NUMBERS

No.

Function
Select to enter desired characters.
Text field. Entered character(s) will
be displayed.
During character entry, when there is
only one available option for the next
character(s), the next character(s)
will be displayed in gray text in the
text field automatically. Gray text is
entered by selecting this button.
Select to erase one character. Select
and hold to continue erasing characters.
Select to display the alphabet keys.
Select to display other symbols.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

 On certain letter entry screens, letters can
be entered in upper or lower case.

: Select to enter in lower case.
: Select to enter in upper case.
 Keyboard layout can be changed. (P.
56)

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

LIST SCREEN

INFORMATION

LIST SCREEN OPERATION

■ SELECTING ALL ITEMS
Icon

Function
Select to skip to the next or previous page.
Select and hold
or
to
scroll through the displayed list.
This indicates the
screen’s position.

Some lists contain “Select All”. If
“Select All” is selected, it is possible to
select all items.

1 Select “Select All”.

displayed

If
appears to the right of an
item name, the complete name is
too long to display.
Select
to scroll to the end of
the name.

“Unselect All”: Unselect all items in the list.

Select
to move to the beginning of the name.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2
BASIC FUNCTION

When a list is displayed, use the appropriate screen button to scroll through
the list.
With navigation function: The list screen
may be displayed after entering characters.

●With navigation function: Matching items
from the database are listed even if the
entered address or name is incomplete.
●With navigation function: The list will be
displayed automatically if the maximum
number of characters is entered or
matching items can be displayed on a single list screen.
●With navigation function: The number of
matching items is shown on the right side
of the screen. If the number of matching
items is more than 999, the system displays “” on the screen.
●The “ ” and “ ” buttons on the Remote
Touch can be used to scroll up and down
on list screens.

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

SORTING*
The order of a list displayed on the
screen can be sorted in the order of distance from the current location, date,
category, etc.

1 Select “Sort”.

CHARACTER JUMP BUTTONS
IN LISTS
Some lists contain character screen buttons, “ABC”, “DEF” etc., which allow a
direct jump to list entries that begin with
the same letter as the character screen
button.

1 Select the desired character jump buttons.

2 Select the desired sorting criteria.
INFORMATION

●Every time the same character screen
button is selected, the list starting with the
subsequent character is displayed.

*: With navigation function
36

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

4. SCREEN ADJUSTMENT
3 Select the items to be set.
2

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

No.

Function

Page

Select to turn the screen off.
To turn it on, press any button on the audio panel or on
the Remote Touch.



Select to turn day mode
on/off.

Select to adjust the screen
display.

2 Select “Display”.

Select to adjust the camera
display.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

BASIC FUNCTION

The contrast and brightness of the
screen display and the image of the
camera display can be adjusted. The
screen can also be turned off, and/or
changed to either day or night mode.
(For information regarding audio/visual
screen adjustment: P. 149)

1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION

CHANGING BETWEEN DAY
AND NIGHT MODE
Depending on the position of the headlight switch, the screen changes to day
or night mode. This feature is available
when the headlight is switched on.

1 Select “Day Mode”.
INFORMATION

●If the screen is set to day mode with the
headlight switch turned on, this condition
is memorized even with the engine
turned off.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

ADJUSTING THE CONTRAST/
BRIGHTNESS
The contrast and brightness of the
screen can be adjusted according to the
brightness of your surroundings.

1 Select “General” or “Camera”.
2 Select the desired item.
 “Display (General)” screen only: Select “ ”
or “ ” to select the desired display.
Screen button

Function

“Contrast” “+”

Select to strengthen the
contrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-”

Select to weaken the
contrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+”

Select to brighten the
screen.

“Brightness” “-”

Select to darken the
screen.

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

1. REGISTERING/CONNECTING Bluetooth® DEVICE
REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
PHONE FOR THE FIRST TIME

 Operations up to this point can also be performed by pressing the
switch on the
steering wheel.

4 Select “Yes” to register a phone.

1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting
of your cellular phone on.

 This function is not available when
Bluetooth® connection setting of your cellular phone is set to off.

2 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

5 When this screen is displayed, search

for the device name displayed on this
screen on the screen of your
Bluetooth® device.

 For details about operating the Bluetooth®
device, see the manual that comes with it.
 To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

BASIC FUNCTION

To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth® phone with
the system.
Once the phone has been registered, it
is possible to use the hands-free system.
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
For details about registering a
Bluetooth® device: P. 46

3 Select “Phone”.

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

6 Register the Bluetooth® device using
your Bluetooth®

device.

 A PIN code is not required for SSP (Secure
Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth®
devices. Depending on the type of
Bluetooth® device being connected, a
message confirming registration may be
displayed on the Bluetooth® device’s
screen. Respond and operate the
Bluetooth® device according to the
confirmation message.

7 Check that the following screen is dis-

played, indicating pairing was successful (a Bluetooth® link has been
established but registration is not yet
complete).

 The system waits for connection requests
coming from the registered device.
 At this stage, the Bluetooth® functions are
not yet available.
 To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8 Check that “Connected” is displayed
and registration is complete.

 If displayed, select “OK” to complete the
registration process.
 If an error message is displayed, follow the
guidance on the screen to try again.
INFORMATION

●If a cellular phone does not operate properly after being connected, turn the cellular phone off and on and then connect it
again.

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
AUDIO PLAYER FOR THE
FIRST TIME

3 Select “Radio” or “Media”.
2

To use the
Audio, it is necessary to register an audio player with
the system.
Once the player has been registered, it
is possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio.
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.
For details about registering a
Bluetooth® device: P. 46

BASIC FUNCTION

Bluetooth®

4 Select “Source”.

1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting
of your audio player on.

 This function is not available when the
Bluetooth® connection setting of your
audio player is set to off.

5 Select “Bluetooth*”.

2 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

6 Select “Connect”.

7 Select “Yes” to register a audio player.

8 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A
Bluetooth® PHONE FOR THE FIRST
TIME” from “STEP 5”. (P. 39)

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

PROFILES
This system supports the following services.
2

Bluetooth®
Phone/
Bluetooth®
Audio
Player

Spec.

Bluetooth® Specification

Bluetooth®
Device

Profile
HFP (Hands-Free Profile)
OPP (Object Push Profile)

Bluetooth®
Phone

Bluetooth®
Audio
Player

PBAP (Phone Book Access
Profile)

Function

Requirements

Recommendations

Registering a
Bluetooth® device

Ver.2.0

Ver.3.0
+EDR

Function

Requirements

Recommendations

Ver. 1.0

Ver. 1.6

Ver.1.1

Ver.1.2

Ver. 1.0

Ver. 1.1

Hands-free
system
Transferring the
contacts

MAP (Message Access Profile)

Bluetooth®
phone message



Ver. 1.0

SPP (Serial Port Profile)

“LEXUS App
Suite” function*



Ver. 1.2

Ver. 1.0

Ver. 1.3

Ver. 1.0

Ver. 1.5

A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile)
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote
Control Profile)

Bluetooth® audio system

*: With navigation function

LS460_600h_Navi_U

BASIC FUNCTION

Bluetooth
Device

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

INFORMATION

●If your cellular phone does not support HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone or using
OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP profiles individually will not be possible.
●If the connected Bluetooth® device version is older than recommended or incompatible,
the Bluetooth® device function may not work properly.
●Refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink to find approved Bluetooth® phones for this
system.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

2. SETTING Bluetooth® DETAILS
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

4 Select the desired item to be set.
2
BASIC FUNCTION

“Bluetooth* Setup” SCREEN

2 Select “Setup”.

3 Select “Bluetooth*”.

Function

Page
®

Registering a Bluetooth device

Deleting a Bluetooth® device

Connecting a Bluetooth® device

Editing the Bluetooth
formation

device in-

Bluetooth® system settings

50
52

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

DISPLAYING THE “Bluetooth*
Setup” SCREEN IN A
DIFFERENT WAY

REGISTERING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE

1 Press the “MENU” button on the

Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices can be registered.

2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “Phone”.
4 Select “Connect Phone”.

Bluetooth® compatible phones (HFP)
and audio players (AVP) can be registered simultaneously.
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.

Remote Touch.

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(P. 45)

2 Select “Add”.
When another Bluetooth® device is connected
 To disconnect the Bluetooth® device,
select “Yes”.

When 5 Bluetooth® devices have already been registered
 A registered device needs to be replaced.
Select “Yes”, and select the device to be
replaced.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

3 When this screen is displayed, search

5 Check that the following screen is dis-

 For details about operating the Bluetooth®
device, see the manual that comes with it.
 To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

 The system waits for connection requests
coming from the registered device.

for the device name displayed on this
screen on the screen of your
Bluetooth® device.

played, indicating pairing was successful (a Bluetooth® link has been
established but registration is not yet
2
complete).
BASIC FUNCTION

4 Register the Bluetooth® device using
your Bluetooth® device.
 A PIN code is not required for SSP (Secure
Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth®
devices. Depending on the type of
Bluetooth® device being connected, a
message confirming registration may be
displayed on the Bluetooth® device’s
screen. Respond and operate the
Bluetooth® device according to the confirmation message.

 At this stage, the Bluetooth® functions are
not yet available.
 To cancel the registration, select “Cancel”.

6 Check that “Connected” is displayed
and registration is complete.

 If displayed, select “OK” to complete the
registration process.
 If an error message is displayed, follow the
guidance on the screen to try again.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

DELETING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE

CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE

This operation cannot be performed
while driving.

Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices (Phones
(HFP) and audio players (AVP)) can be
registered.

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(P. 45)

2 Select “Remove”.
3 Select the desired device.

If more than 1 Bluetooth® device has
been registered, select which device to
connect to.

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(P. 45)

2 Select the device to be connected.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

5 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

INFORMATION

●When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, the
contact data will be deleted at the same
time.

 Supported profile icons will be displayed.

: Phone
: Audio player
: Phone/“LEXUS App Suite” service
 The profile icon for a currently connected
device will be displayed in color.
 Selecting a profile icon which is not currently connected will switch the connection
to the function.
 If the desired Bluetooth® device is not on
the list, select “Add” to register the
device. (P. 46)

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

3 Select the desired connection.

■ AUTO CONNECTION MODE

4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the connection is complete.

 If an error message is displayed, follow the
guidance on the screen to try again.
INFORMATION

●It may take time if the device connection
is carried out during Bluetooth® audio
playback.
●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
device being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the
device.
●When disconnecting a Bluetooth®
device, it is recommended to disconnect
using the system.

 When the engine switch is in
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode, the system searches for a nearby
registered device.
 The system will connect with the registered
device that was last connected, if it is
nearby. When automatic connection priority is set to on and there is more than one
registered Bluetooth® phone available, the
system will automatically connect to the
Bluetooth® phone with the highest priority.
(P. 53)

■ CONNECTING MANUALLY
When the auto connection has failed or
“Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it is
necessary to connect Bluetooth® manually.

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “Bluetooth*”.
4 Follow the steps in “CONNECTING A
Bluetooth® DEVICE” from “STEP 2”.
(P. 48)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2
BASIC FUNCTION

To turn auto connection mode on, set
“Bluetooth* Power” to on. (P. 53)
Leave the Bluetooth® device in a location where the connection can be established.

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

■ RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth®
PHONE

EDITING THE Bluetooth®
DEVICE INFORMATION

If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnected
due to poor reception from the
Bluetooth® network when the engine
switch is in ACCESSORY or
IGNITION ON mode, the system automatically reconnects the
Bluetooth® phone.

The Bluetooth® device’s information
can be displayed on the screen. The displayed information can be edited.
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(P. 45)

2 Select the desired device to be edited.
3 Select “Device Info”.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

4 Confirm and change the Bluetooth®
device information.

INFORMATION

CHANGING A DEVICE NAME

1 Select “Device Name”.
2 Enter the name and select “OK”.
INFORMATION

No.

●Even if the device name is changed, the
name registered in your Bluetooth®
device does not change.

Information
The name of the Bluetooth® device.
Can be changed to a desired name.
(P. 51)
Select to set the Bluetooth® audio
player connection method.
(P. 52)
Device address is unique to the device and cannot be changed.
Phone number of the Bluetooth®
phone.
Compatibility profile
Bluetooth® device.

the

Select to reset all setup items.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2
BASIC FUNCTION

●If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been registered with the same device name, the
devices can be distinguished referring to
the device’s address.
●Depending on the type of phone, some
information may not be displayed.

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

SETTING AUDIO PLAYER
CONNECTION METHOD

1 Select “Connect Audio Player from”.
2 Select the desired connection method.

“System Settings” SCREEN
The Bluetooth® settings can be confirmed and changed.

1 Display the “Bluetooth* Setup” screen.
(P. 45)

2 Select “System Settings”.
3 Select the desired item to be set.

“Vehicle”: Select to connect the audio system to the audio player.
“Device”: Select to connect the audio player to the audio system.
 Depending on the audio player, the “Vehicle” or “Device” connection method may
be best. As such, refer to the manual that
comes with the audio player.

No.

Function

Page

Select to set Bluetooth®
connection on/off.

Select to change the automatic connection priority of
the registered Bluetooth®
devices.

Select to edit the system information.

Select to reset all setup
items.



*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

CHANGING “Bluetooth*
Power”

1 Select “Bluetooth* Power”.
When “Bluetooth* Power” is on:

The automatic connection priority of the
registered Bluetooth® devices can be
changed.

1 Select “Preferred Device Settings”.
2 Select the desired item to be set.

INFORMATION

●While driving, the auto connection state
can be changed from off to on, but cannot be changed from on to off.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

No.

Function

Page

Select to set automatic
connection priority on/off.



Select to change the automatic connection priority of
the registered Bluetooth®
phones.

Select to change the automatic connection priority of
the registered Bluetooth®
audio players.

Select to reset all setup
items.



INFORMATION

●A newly registered Bluetooth® device
will automatically be given the highest
automatic connection priority.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2
BASIC FUNCTION

The Bluetooth® device is automatically
connected when the engine switch
is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
When “Bluetooth* Power” is off:
The Bluetooth® device is disconnected,
and the system will not connect to it next
time.

SETTING AUTOMATIC
CONNECTION PRIORITY

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

■ CHANGING PHONE AUTOMATIC CONNECTION PRIORITY

EDITING THE SYSTEM
INFORMATION

1 Select “Preferred Phones”.
2 Select the desired Bluetooth® device

1 Select “System Information”.
2 Select the desired item to be set.

and select “Up” or “Down” to change
the preferred order.

■ CHANGING AUDIO PLAYER AUTOMATIC CONNECTION PRIORITY

1 Select “Preferred Audio Players”.
2 Select the desired Bluetooth® device

and select “Up” or “Down” to change
the preferred order.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. Bluetooth® SETTINGS

No.

Information

Page

Displays system name. Can
be changed to a desired
name.

■ EDITING THE SYSTEM NAME

1 Select “System Name”.
2 Enter a name and select “OK”.

■ EDITING THE PIN CODE
55

Device address is unique to
the device and cannot be
changed.



Select to set the phone connection status display on/
off.



Select to set the connection
status display of the audio
player on/off.



Compatibility profile of the
system



Select to reset all setup
items.



BASIC FUNCTION

PIN code used when the
Bluetooth® device was
registered.
Can
be
changed to a desired code.

1 Select “System PIN Code”.
2 Enter a PIN code and select “OK”.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. OTHER SETTINGS

1. GENERAL SETTINGS
Settings are available for automatic
screen change, operation sounds, etc.

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “General”.
4 Select the items to be set.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

GENERAL SETTINGS SCREEN

3. OTHER SETTINGS

No.

Function
Select to change the time zone, set
the daylight saving time on/off and
set the automatic adjustment of the
clock on/off. (P. 58)

Select to change the unit of measure
for distance.
Select to change the screen button
color.
Select to change the keyboard layout.
Select to customize the startup/
screen off images. (P. 59)

Select to set automatic screen
changes from the audio/air conditioning control screen to the previous screen to on/off. When set to on,
the screen will automatically return
to the previous screen from the audio/air conditioning control screen
after 20 seconds.

Function
Select to adjust the pointer sound
volume.
Select to adjust the strength of the
pull from the buttons to the pointer.
Select to delete personal data.
(P. 61)
Select to update software versions.
For details, contact your Lexus dealer.
Select to update “Gracenote” database versions. For details, contact
your Lexus dealer.
Select to display the software information. Notices related to third party
software used in this product are enlisted. (This includes instructions for
obtaining such software, where applicable.)

Select to set the selection sounds
on/off.
Select to set the pointer sounds on/
off.
Select to set the error sounds on/off.
*: With navigation function

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2
BASIC FUNCTION

Select to change the language.

No.

3. OTHER SETTINGS

CLOCK SETTINGS
Used for changing the time zone and
setting of daylight saving time and automatic time adjustment on/off.

1 Display the “General Settings” screen.
(P. 56)

2 Select “Clock”.
3 Select the items to be set.

■ SETTING THE TIME ZONE

1 Select “Time Zone”.
2 Select the desired time zone.
 If “Other” is selected, the zone can be
adjusted manually. Select “+” or “-” to
adjust the time zone.

■ MANUAL CLOCK SETTING
When “Auto Adjust by GPS” is turned
“Off”, the clock can be manually adjusted.

1 Select the desired item.

No.

Function
Select to change the time zone.
(P. 58)
Select to set daylight saving time on/
off.
Select to set automatic adjustment of
the clock by GPS on/off. When set to
on, the system will automatically adjust the clock to the current position’s
time zone when the vehicle moves to
a different time zone. When set to off,
the clock can be manually adjusted.
(P. 58)

LS460_600h_Navi_U

No.

Function
Select “+” to set the time forward
one hour and “-” to set the time back
one hour.
Select “+” to set the time forward
one minute and “-” to set the time
back one minute.
Select to round to the nearest hour.
e.g. 1:00 to 1:29  1:00
1:30 to 1:59  2:00

3. OTHER SETTINGS

CUSTOMIZING THE STARTUP
AND SCREEN OFF IMAGES

No.

Function

Page

Select to copy images from
a USB memory.

Select to delete images.

Select to set an image as the
startup or screen off image.

1 Display the “General Settings” screen.
(P. 56)

2 Select “Customize Images”.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

BASIC FUNCTION

An image can be copied from a USB
memory and used as the startup and
screen off Images.
The built-in movie can also be set as the
startup image.
When the engine switch is
turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode, the initial screen (startup image) will be displayed. (P. 30)
When “Screen Off” on the “Display”
screen is selected, the screen is turned
off and the desired screen off image that
is set is displayed. (To turn the screen off:
P. 37)

3 Select the items to be set.

3. OTHER SETTINGS

■ TRANSFERRING IMAGES

1 Open the console box, then open the
cover and connect a USB memory.

NOTICE
●Depending on the size and shape of the
device that is connected to the system,
the console box may not close fully. In this
case, do not forcibly close the console
box as this may damage the device or the
terminal, etc.
INFORMATION

 Turn on the power of the USB memory if it
is not turned on.

2 Close the console box.
3 Select “Copy from USB”.
4 Select the desired images from the list
and then select “Copy”.

 The selected image is displayed on the
right side of the screen. If the selected
image file is broken or incompatible,
will be displayed.
 The remaining number of image files that
can be transferred is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

5 Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

●When saving image files to a USB memory to be transferred to the system, save
the images in a folder named “Image” (Im-a-g-e, case sensitive). If a different
folder name is used, the system will not
recognize the image files.
●The compatible file extensions are JPG
and JPEG.
●An image's file name, including file extension, can be up to 32 characters.
●Image files of 10 MB or less can be transferred.
●Up to 10 images can be transferred to the
system.
●Files with non-ASCII filenames can not
be transferred.

3. OTHER SETTINGS

■ DELETING TRANSFERRED IMAGES

1 Select “Set Images”.
2 Select the “Movies” or “Images” tab

1 Select “Delete Images”.
2 Select the images to be deleted and se-

3 Select the desired items to be set.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation

and select the desired movie or image.

lect “Delete”.

screen appears.

DELETING PERSONAL DATA

1 Display the “General Settings” screen.
(P. 56)

No.

Function
Select to set an image as the startup
image.

2 Select “Delete Personal Data”.
3 Select “Delete”.
4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

Select to set an image as the screen
off image.
Select to set an image as both the
startup and screen off image.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2
BASIC FUNCTION

■ SETTING THE STARTUP AND
SCREEN OFF IMAGES

3. OTHER SETTINGS

 Registered or changed personal settings
will be deleted or returned to their default
conditions.
For example:
• General settings
• Navigation settings*
• Audio settings
• Phone settings
• Lexus Enform settings*
*: With navigation function

NOTICE
●With navigation function: Make sure the
map microSD card is inserted when
deleting personal data. The personal data
cannot be deleted when the map
microSD card is removed. To delete the
data, after inserting the map microSD
card, turn the engine switch to
ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. OTHER SETTINGS

2. VOICE SETTINGS
Voice guidance etc. can be set.

VOICE SETTINGS SCREEN

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

2
BASIC FUNCTION

2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “Voice”.
4 Select the items to be set.
INFORMATION

*: With navigation function

●“Voice Settings” screen can also be displayed from the voice recognition top
screen. (P. 301)

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. OTHER SETTINGS

No.

Function
Select to adjust the volume of voice
guidance.

Select to set the voice guidance during route guidance on/off.

Select to set the voice guidance during audio/visual and/or air conditioning system use on/off.
Select to set the voice recognition
prompts on/off.
Select to train voice recognition.
The voice command system adapt
the user accent.
Select to set the voice confirmation
display on/off.

Select to set the beep sound of navigation guidance.
Select to reset all setup items.

*: With navigation function

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. OTHER SETTINGS

3. VEHICLE SETTINGS
Settings are available for maintenance,
vehicle customization, intuitive parking
assist-sensor, etc.

4 Select the items to be set.

1 Press the “MENU” button on the

Remote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “Vehicle”.

BASIC FUNCTION

No.

Function

Page

Select to set maintenance.

Select to set vehicle
customization.

“Owner’s
Manual”

Select to set intuitive
parking assist-sensor.

341

Select to set back
camera guide line.

322

*: With navigation function

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. OTHER SETTINGS

MAINTENANCE*
When the system is turned on, the
“Maintenance Reminder” screen displays when it is time to replace a part or
certain components. (P. 30)

1 Display the “Vehicle Settings” screen.
(P. 65)

2 Select “Maintenance”.
3 Select the desired item.

No.

Function

Page

Select to set the condition
of parts or components.

Select to add new information items separately from
provided ones.



Select to cancel all conditions which have been entered.



Select to reset the items
which have expired conditions.



Select to call the registered
dealer.



Select to register/edit dealer information.

When set to on, the indicator will illuminate. The system is set to give
maintenance information
with the “Maintenance Reminder” screen.

INFORMATION

●When the vehicle needs to be serviced,
the screen button color will change to
orange.

*: With navigation function
66

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. OTHER SETTINGS

MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION SETTING

1 Select the desired part or component
screen button.

●For scheduled maintenance information,
refer to “Warranty and Services Guide/
Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.
●Depending on driving or road conditions,
the actual date and distance that maintenance should be performed may differ
from the stored date and distance in the
system.

DEALER SETTING

No.

Function
Select to enter the next maintenance
date.
Select to enter the driving distance
until the next maintenance check.
Select to cancel the conditions which
have been entered.

Dealer information can be registered in
the system. With dealer information registered, route guidance to the dealer is
available.

1 Select “Set Dealer”.
2 Select the desired item to search for the
location. (P. 88)

 The editing dealer screen appears after
setting the location.

Select to reset the conditions which
have expired.

3 Select “OK” after entering the conditions.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2
BASIC FUNCTION

2 Set the conditions.

INFORMATION

3. OTHER SETTINGS

3 Select the items to be edited.

■ EDITING DEALER OR CONTACT
NAME

1 Select “Edit” next to “Dealer” or
“Contact”.

2 Enter the name and select “OK”.
■ EDITING THE LOCATION
No.

Function

Page

Select to enter the name of
a dealer.

Select to enter the name of
a dealer member.

Select to set the location.

Select to enter the phone
number.

Select to delete the dealer
information displayed on
the screen.



Select to set the displayed
dealer as a destination.

100

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”.
2 Scroll the map to the desired point (P.
79) and select “OK”.

■ EDITING PHONE NUMBER

1 Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.
2 Enter the phone number and select
“OK”.

3. OTHER SETTINGS

2
BASIC FUNCTION
69

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM*

BASIC OPERATION

2 DESTINATION SEARCH

MAP SCREEN............................................................. 72

1. DESTINATION SEARCH
OPERATION ........................................... 88

NAVIGATION OPTIONS SCREEN .............. 74

SELECTING SEARCH AREA............................ 90

1. QUICK REFERENCE............................... 72

2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION................ 75

SETTING HOME AS DESTINATION............ 90

CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY...................... 75

SETTING PRESET DESTINATIONS
AS DESTINATION............................................... 90

MAP SCALE ................................................................ 76

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS................................ 91

ORIENTATION OF THE MAP........................... 77

SEARCHING BY
POINT OF INTEREST.......................................... 92

SWITCHING THE MAP MODE........................ 78
SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION..................... 78
ADJUSTING LOCATION IN
SMALL INCREMENTS....................................... 79

DESTINATION SEARCH BY
DESTINATION ASSIST ...................................... 96
SEARCHING FROM PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS..................................................... 96

3. MAP SCREEN INFORMATION......... 80

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS BOOK.............. 96

DISPLAYING MAP INFORMATION ........... 80

SEARCHING BY EMERGENCY..................... 97

DISPLAYING INFORMATION
ABOUT THE ICON WHERE
THE CURSOR IS SET ......................................... 83

SEARCHING BY
INTERSECTION AND FREEWAY............... 97

STANDARD MAP ICONS .................................. 84

SEARCHING BY COORDINATES................ 99

4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION .................... 85
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC
INFORMATION ON THE MAP................... 86

SEARCHING BY MAP........................................... 99

2. STARTING ROUTE
GUIDANCE ........................................... 100
CONFIRM DESTINATION SCREEN............ 101
ENTIRE ROUTE MAP SCREEN....................... 101

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3
1

NAVIGATION SYSTEM*
2

3 ROUTE GUIDANCE
1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN.......... 105
SCREEN FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE............ 105

5 SETUP

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION
SETTINGS................................................ 126 4
SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION
SETTINGS................................................................ 126

ROUTE OVERVIEW ............................................. 107
DURING FREEWAY DRIVING....................... 107
WHEN APPROACHING
INTERSECTION................................................... 109

2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS ............................... 130

TURN-BY-TURN ARROW SCREEN............ 110

3. EDITING ROUTE...................................... 112
ADDING DESTINATIONS .................................. 112
REORDERING DESTINATIONS...................... 112
DELETING DESTINATIONS ............................. 113
SETTING ROUTE PREFERENCES................. 113
SELECTING ROUTE TYPE ................................ 113
DETOUR SETTING ................................................. 114
STARTING FROM ADJACENT ROAD....... 115

TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM

1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING
SYSTEM) .................................................. 132 8
LIMITATIONS OF
THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM....................... 132

9
2. MAP DATABASE VERSION
AND COVERED AREA ..................... 135
MAP INFORMATION .......................................... 135
ABOUT THE MAP DATA ................................... 135

4 MEMORY POINTS
1. MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS............ 116
SETTING UP HOME ............................................... 117
SETTING UP PRESET
DESTINATIONS.................................................... 118
SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK ..................... 120
SETTING UP AREAS TO AVOID .................. 123
DELETING PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS................................................... 125

*: With navigation function
71

LS460_600h_Navi_U

SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC SETTINGS.............. 130

TURN LIST SCREEN............................................... 110

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE
PROMPTS .................................................. 111

1. BASIC OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE
MAP SCREEN
The map screen can be reached by the following methods:
Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch.

No.

Name

Function

Page

2D north up, 2D
heading up or 3D
heading up symbol

Indicates whether the map orientation is set to
north-up or heading-up. The letter(s) beside this
symbol indicate the vehicle’s heading direction
(e.g. N for north). In 3D map, only a heading-up
view is available.

Scale indicator

This figure indicates the map scale.

“GPS” mark
(Global Positioning System)

Shows that the vehicle is receiving signals from
the GPS.

132

Traffic indicator

Shows that traffic information is received. Select
to start voice guidance for traffic information.
When traffic information is received via HD Radio
broadcast, HD mark is displayed on the right.

Options button

Select to display the “Navigation Options” screen.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC OPERATION

No.

Name

Function

Page

Zoom in/out button

Select to magnify or reduce the map scale. When
either button is selected, the map scale indicator
bar appears at the bottom of the screen.

Footprint
button

Select to display the footprint map screen.

map

Select to display the “Destination” screen.

Speed limit icon

Indicates the speed limit on the current road. The
display of the speed limit icon can be set to on/off.

Route information bar

Displays the current street name, or the distance
with the estimated travel time/arrival time to the
destination. The route information bar fills from
left to right as the vehicle progresses on the route.

Route information button

Select to change the display between the current
street name and the distance with the estimated
travel/arrival time.

Screen
button

Select to change the map screen to full screen display.

change

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Destination button

105



*: This function is not made available on some models.
INFORMATION

●Certain screen buttons on the map screen will disappear several seconds after the Remote
Touch has been operated. This setting can be changed so that all the screen buttons will
always be displayed.(P. 126)
●Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch to display the address of the current position
on the map screen or repeat voice guidance.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC OPERATION

NAVIGATION OPTIONS SCREEN
The navigation options screen can be reached by the following methods:
Select

on the map screen. (P. 72)

No.

Function

Page

Select to display the desired map configuration.

Select to set display of the map information such as POI icons, route
trace, speed limit, etc.

Select to display the map version and coverage area.

135

Select to edit the set route.

112

Select to pause or resume route guidance.



Select to display the overview of the entire route.

107

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC OPERATION

2. MAP SCREEN OPERATION
CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY

1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote
Touch.

displayed.

●While driving, the current position mark
is fixed on the screen and the map moves.
●The current position is automatically set
as the vehicle receives signals from the
GPS (Global Positioning System). If the
current position is not correct, it is automatically corrected after the vehicle
receives signals from the GPS.
●After the 12-volt battery disconnection,
or on a new vehicle, the current position
may not be correct. As soon as the system receives signals from the GPS, the
correct current position is displayed.
●When the vehicle travels out of the coverage area, the guidance screen changes to
the whole compass mode screen.

 Selecting
will change the map
screen to full screen display.
 To correct the current position manually:P. 129

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

2 Check that the current position map is

INFORMATION

1. BASIC OPERATION

MAP SCALE

1 Select

or
to change the
scale of the map screen.

FOOTPRINT MAP
For areas covered by the footprint map
(some major cities), a footprint map on a
scale of 75 ft. (25 m) can be selected.
When the map is scaled down to 150 ft.
(50 m),
changes to
and can
be selected to display the footprint map.

1 Select
on the map screen.
2 Check that the footprint map is dis The scale indicator bar appears at the bottom of the screen.

played.

 Select and hold
or
to continue
changing the scale of the map screen.
 The scale of the map screen can also be
changed by selecting the scale bar directly.
This function is not available while driving.
INFORMATION

●Press the “ ” button on the Remote
Touch to zoom in on the map screen and
the “ ” button to zoom out.
●In areas where the footprint map is available the map scale changes from
to

when at the minimum range.

 To return to the normal map display, select
.
INFORMATION

●If the map or the current position is
moved to the area which is not covered
by the footprint map, the screen scale
automatically changes to 150 ft. (50 m).
●On the footprint map, a one way street is
displayed by
.
●Scrolling on the footprint map is not available while driving.

Building footprints in the database were
created and provided by HERE.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC OPERATION

3D CITY MODEL MAP

ORIENTATION OF THE MAP

A 3D city model map can be displayed
for some areas in major cities when the
map scale is 700 ft. (200 m) or less on
the 3D map screen.
 To display the normal map, select

●The 3D city model map can be set the
display on/off. (P. 126)

ROTATING 3D MAP
3D map and 3D city model map can be
rotated when arrows appear around the
cursor while scrolling.

1 Select an arrow to rotate.

: North-up symbol
Regardless of the direction of vehicle travel,
north is always up.
: Heading-up symbol
The direction of vehicle travel is always up.
: 3D Heading-up symbol
The direction of vehicle travel is always up.
 The letter(s) beside this symbol indicate the
vehicle’s heading direction (e.g. N for
north).

INFORMATION

●The viewing angle of the 3D map can be
changed. (P. 128)

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

INFORMATION

The orientation of the map can be
changed between 2D north-up, 2D
heading-up and 3D heading-up by selecting the orientation symbol displayed
at the top left of the screen.

1. BASIC OPERATION

SWITCHING THE MAP MODE

1 Select

on the map screen.

(P. 72)

2 Select “Map Mode”.
3 Select the desired configuration button.

No.

SCREEN SCROLL
OPERATION
Use the scroll feature to move the desired point to the center of the screen for
looking at a point on the map that is different from the current position.

Function

Page

Select to display the single
map screen.



Cursor mark

Select to display the turn list
screen.

110

Distance from the current position to
the cursor mark

Select to display the freeway exit list screen.

107

Select to display the intersection guidance screen or
the guidance screen on the
freeway.

109

Select to display the turnby-turn arrow screen.

110

Select to set as a destination.
When selecting “Go to ” on the
following map screen, the navigation
system performs a search for the
route. (P. 100)
If a destination has already been set,
“Go to ” and “Add to Route” will
be displayed.
“Go to ”: Select to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new one.
“Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.

 Depending on the conditions, certain
screen configuration buttons cannot be
selected.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

No.

Information/Function

Select to register as a memory point.
To change the icon, name, etc.:
P. 120

1. BASIC OPERATION

 To scroll over the map screen, place the
cursor mark in the desired position and
then press and hold the Remote Touch
knob. The map will continue scrolling in that
direction until the knob is released.
 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote
Touch to return to the current position.

ADJUSTING LOCATION IN
SMALL INCREMENTS

1 Select one of the 8 directional arrows to

move the cursor to the desired point
and then select “OK”.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

The cursor location can be adjusted in
small increments when “Adjust Location” is selected on the setting map
screen.
Also, when changing the location of
memory points on the editing screen
(P. 122) and adjusting the current position mark manually on the “Calibration”
screen (P. 129), 8 directional arrows
may appear for this purpose.

1. BASIC OPERATION

3. MAP SCREEN INFORMATION
SELECTING THE POI ICONS

DISPLAYING MAP
INFORMATION

1 Display the “Map Information” screen.

Information such as POI icons, route
trace, speed limit, etc. can be displayed
on the map screen.

1 Select

on the map screen.

(P. 80)

2 Select “Select POI”.
 When the POI icons to be displayed on the
map screen have already been set,
“Change POI” is displayed.

3 Select the desired POI category and se-

(P. 72)

2 Select “Map Information”.
3 Select the desired items to be displayed.

lect “OK”.

No.
No.

Function

Page

Select to display the selected POI icons.



Select to select or change
POI icons.

Select to display eDestination icons.

401

Select to display route
trace.

Select to display traffic information.

Select to display speed limit
icon.



*: This function is not made available on
some models.

 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Information/Function

Page

Displays up to 5 selected
POI icons on the map
screen.



Select to cancel the selected POI icons.



Displays up to 6 POI icons
as favorite POI categories

127

Select to display other POI
categories if the desired
POIs cannot be found on
the screen.

Select to search for the
nearest POIs.

1. BASIC OPERATION

■ SELECTING OTHER POI ICONS
TO BE DISPLAYED

1 Select “Other POIs”.
2 Select the desired POI categories and

POIs that are within 20 miles (32 km) of
the current position will be listed from
among the selected categories.

1 Select “Find Local POI”.
2 Select the desired POI.

“Near...”: Select to search for POIs near the
current position or along the route.

3 Check that the selected POI is dis-

played on the map screen.
When “Near...” is selected

1 Select the desired item.

No.

Function
Select to search for POIs near the
current position.
Select to search for POIs along the
route.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

select “OK”.
“List All Categories”: Select to display all
POI categories. To add more POI categories, select “More”.

■ DISPLAYING THE LOCAL POI
LIST

1. BASIC OPERATION

ROUTE TRACE

■ STOP RECORDING THE ROUTE
TRACE

The traveled route can be stored and retraced on the map screen. This feature is
available when the map scale is 30 miles
(50 km) or less.

1 Display the “Map Information” screen.

■ START RECORDING THE ROUTE
TRACE

“Yes”: Select to keep the recorded
route trace.
“No”: Select to erase the recorded
route trace.

1 Display the “Map Information” screen.
(P. 80)

2 Select “Route Trace”.
 The “Route Trace” indicator illuminates and
the route trace starts.

3 Check that the traveled line is displayed.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

(P. 80)

2 Select “Route Trace” again.
3 A confirmation screen will be displayed.

INFORMATION

●The traveled route can be stored up to
124 miles (200 km).

1. BASIC OPERATION

“Mark”: Select to register as a memory
point. To change the icon, name, etc.:
P. 120
“Enter ”: Select to set as a destination.

When the cursor is placed over an icon
on the map screen, the name bar is displayed on the upper part of the screen. If
“Info” appears on the right side of the
name bar, detailed information can be
displayed.

: Select to call the registered
number.
3
“Delete”: Select to delete destination or
memory point.
“Edit”: Select to display the edit memory
point screen.
“Detail”: Select to display detailed information.

1 Place the cursor over an icon.
2 Select “Info”.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

DISPLAYING INFORMATION
ABOUT THE ICON WHERE
THE CURSOR IS SET

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC OPERATION

INFORMATION

●Even when traffic information is not currently being received, traffic information
and “Info” will be displayed for a while
after traffic information has been
received.
●In some situations, calls to a POI may
automatically change to an international
call or may not be possible as a domestic
call.

STANDARD MAP ICONS
Icon

Name
Island
Park
Industry
Business facility
Airport
Military
University
Hospital
Stadium
Shopping mall
Golf

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC OPERATION

4. TRAFFIC INFORMATION*
Traffic data can be received via HD Radio broadcast or LEXUS App Suite to
display traffic information on the map
screen.

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC
INFORMATION
A list of current traffic information can
be displayed along with information on
the location and the distance of the incident.

“On Current Road”: Select to display traffic
information for the current road.
“On Current Route”: Select to display traffic information for the set route.
 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

2 Select “Info”.
3 Select “Traffic Incidents”.
4 Select the desired item.

4 Check that the traffic information is dis-

“Traffic Event List”: Select to display a list
of current traffic information. (P. 85)
“Predictive Traffic Map”: Select to display
a map with predictive traffic data.
(P. 86)

played.
“Detail”: Select to display detailed traffic information.

INFORMATION

●If a large amount of information is being
received, it may take longer than normal
for the information to be displayed on the
screen.

*: This function is not made available on some models.
85

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1 Display the “Traffic” screen. (P. 85)
2 Select “Traffic Event List”.
3 Select the desired traffic information.

1. BASIC OPERATION

DISPLAYING PREDICTIVE
TRAFFIC MAP

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC
INFORMATION ON THE MAP

A map with predictive traffic data can be
displayed.

1 Select

1 Display the “Traffic” screen. (P. 85)
2 Select “Predictive Traffic Map”.
3 Scroll the map to the desired point and

2 Select “Map Information”.
3 Select “Traffic Information”.

set the time of predictive traffic information.

 The time of the predictive traffic information can be displayed in 15-minute steps up
to +45 minutes.

“+”: Moves the time forward 15 minutes.
“-”: Moves the time back 15 minutes.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

on the map screen.

(P. 72)

 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

4 Check that the traffic information is displayed.

1. BASIC OPERATION

: The icons show traffic incident, road
repair, traffic obstacles, etc. Select to display traffic information and start voice
guidance for the traffic information.
: The color of the arrow changes
depending on the traffic information received.

ceived.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

 The indicator is displayed as follows:

: Traffic information has been re-

: Traffic information has been received via HD Radio broadcast.
No icon: Traffic information has not been
received.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

1. DESTINATION SEARCH OPERATION
The “Destination” screen can be reached by the following methods:
From the map screen
Select “Dest.”on the map screen. (P. 72)
From the “Menu” screen
Select “Destination” on the “Menu” screen. (P. 14)

No.

Function

Page

Select to search for a destination by address.

Select to search for a destination by point of interest.

Select to search for a destination by online database.

398

Select to search for a destination via the Lexus response center.

400

Select to search for a destination from previously set destinations.

Select to search for a destination from a registered entry in “Address
Book”.

Select to search for a destination from emergency service points.

Select to search for a destination by intersection or freeway entrance/
exit.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

No.

Function

Page

Select to search for a destination by the last displayed map.

Select to search for a destination by coordinates.

Select to set a destination by home.

Select to set a destination from preset destinations.

Select to delete set destinations.

113

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

*: This function is not made available on some models.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

SELECTING SEARCH AREA
The selected state (province) can be
changed to set a destination from a
different state (province) by using
“Address”, “Point of Interest” or
“Intersection & Freeway”.

1 Display the “Destination” screen.
(P. 88)

2 Select “Address”, “Point of Interest” or
“Intersection & Freeway”.

3 Select “Select State/Province” or
“Change State/Province”.

SETTING HOME AS
DESTINATION
To use this function, it is necessary to
register a home address. (P. 117)

1 Display the “Destination” screen.
(P. 88)

2 Select “Go Home”.
 The navigation system performs a search
for the route and the entire route map is
displayed. (P. 101)

SETTING PRESET
DESTINATIONS AS
DESTINATION
To use this function, it is necessary to
register preset destinations to the preset
screen buttons (1-5). (P. 118)

 If a state (province) has not been selected
yet, “Select State/Province” is displayed.

4 Select the desired state (province).
 To change countries, select the “United
States”, “Canada” or “Mexico” tab.
 For map database information and updates:
P. 135

1 Display the “Destination” screen.
(P. 88)

2 Select any of the preset destination buttons (1-5).

 The navigation system performs a search
for the route and the entire route map is
displayed. (P. 101)

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

SEARCHING BY CITY

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS
There are 2 methods to search for a destination by address.

1 Select “City”.
2 Enter a city name and select “OK”.

1 Display the “Destination” screen.

“Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name from
the list of the last 5 cities.

(P. 88)

Select the desired city name.
Enter a street name and select “OK”.
Select the desired street name.
Enter a house number and select “OK”.

 If the same address exists, the address list
screen will be displayed. Select the desired
address.

No.

Function

Page

Select to search by city.

Select to search by street
address.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

3
4
5
6

2 Select “Address”.
3 Select the desired search method.

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

SEARCHING BY STREET
ADDRESS

1
2
3
4
5
6

Select “Street Address”.

SEARCHING BY POINT OF
INTEREST

Enter a house number and select “OK”.

There are 4 methods to search for a destination by Points of Interest.

Enter a street name and select “OK”.

1 Display the “Destination” screen.

Select the desired street name.
Enter a city name and select “OK”.
Select the desired city name.

(P. 88)

2 Select “Point of Interest”.
3 Select the desired search method.

 If the same address exists, the address list
screen will be displayed. Select the desired
address.
INFORMATION

●A street name can be searched using
only the body part of its name.
For example: S WESTERN AVE
• A search can be performed by entering
“S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN AVE”
or “WESTERN”.

No.

Function

Page

Select to search by name.

Select to search by category.

Select to search by phone
number.

Select to search by eDestination.

402

*: This function is not made available on some
models.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

■ SELECTING A CITY TO SEARCH

SEARCHING BY NAME

1 Select “Name”.
2 Enter a POI name and select “OK”.
3 Select the desired POI.

1 Select “City”.
2 Enter a city name and select “OK”.
“Any City”: Select to cancel the city setting.

3 Select the desired city name.
4 Select the desired POI.

1 Select “Category”.
2 Select the desired category.
No.

Function

Page

Select to search for POI in
the desired city.

Select to search for POI
from the category list.

Select to search for POI using online database.

 If there is more than 1 detailed item of the
selected category, the detailed list will be
displayed.

“List All Categories”: Select to display all
POI categories.

3 Select the desired POI.

 When entering the name of a specific POI,
and there are 2 or more sites with the same
name, the list screen will be displayed.
Select the desired POI.
INFORMATION

●To search for a facility name using multiple search words, put a space between
each word.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

■ SELECTING FROM THE CATEGORIES

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

■ SEARCHING FOR POI USING
WEB SEARCH*

1 Select “” next to “Web Search” to select a search engine.

2 Select the desired search engine icon.
 The selected search engine icon will be displayed on the top center of the POI list
screen.

3 Select the search engine icon.

SEARCHING BY CATEGORY

1 Select “Category”.
2 Select the desired search point.

No.

Function
Select to set the search point from
near the current position.
Select to search for POIs along the
set route.

 Accessing to a search engine

For the procedure on how to conduct a
search via a search engine, go to “SETTING A DESTINATION USING
LEXUS App Suite” (P. 398), and follow the steps from 3 onward.

Select to set the search point from
near a city center. (P. 95)
Select to set the search point from
near a destination. When more than
1 destination has been set, a list will
be displayed on the screen. Select
the item to be set.

*: This function is not made available on some models.
94

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

3 Select the desired POI category.
 If there is more than 1 detailed item of the
selected category, the detailed list will be
displayed.

4 Select the desired POI.
“Web Search”: Select to search for POI using online database. (P. 94)
INFORMATION

●The names of POIs located within
approximately 200 miles (320 km) from
the selected search point can be displayed.

1 Select “Near a City Center in XX”.
2 Enter a city name and select “OK”.
“Last 5 Cities”: Select the city name from
the list of the last 5 cities.

3 Select the desired city name.
4 Select “OK” when the city center map
screen is displayed.

5 Follow the steps from 3 onward in
“SEARCHING BY CATEGORY”.
(P. 94)

*: XX represents the selected search area
name.
INFORMATION

●If the navigation system has never been
used, selecting the city name from “Last 5
Cities” will not be available.

SEARCHING BY PHONE
NUMBER

1 Select “Phone #”.
2 Enter a phone number and select “OK”.
 If there is more than 1 site with the same
number, the list screen will be displayed.
INFORMATION

●If there is no match for the entered phone
number, a list of identical numbers with
different area codes will be displayed.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

“List All Categories”: Select to display all
POI categories.
“Favorite POI Categories”: Select to use
the 6 POIs that have been previously
set.(P. 127)

When “Near a City Center in XX*” is selected

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

DESTINATION SEARCH BY
DESTINATION ASSIST*

SEARCHING BY ADDRESS
BOOK

The destination can be searched by calling an operator of Destination Assist.
You can request either a specific business, address, or ask for help locating
your desired destination. (P. 400)

To use this function, it is necessary to
register an address book entry.
(P. 120)

1 Display the “Destination” screen.

SEARCHING FROM
PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS

2 Select “Address Book”.
3 Select the desired address book entry.

(P. 88)

“Options”: Select to register or edit address
book entries. (P. 121)

1 Display the “Destination” screen.
(P. 88)

2 Select “Previous Destinations”.
3 Select the desired destination.
“Previous Start Point”: Select to display the
start point map of the previous guided
route.
“Delete”: Select to delete the previous destination. (P. 125)
INFORMATION

●The previous start point and up to 100
previously set destinations are displayed
on the screen.

*: This function is not made available on some models.
96

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

SEARCHING BY
EMERGENCY

1 Display the “Destination” screen.
(P. 88)

INFORMATION

●The navigation system does not guide in
areas where route guidance is unavailable. (P. 133)

There are 2 methods to search for a destination by Intersection & Freeway.

1 Display the “Destination” screen.
(P. 88)

2 Select “Intersection & Freeway”.
3 Select the desired method.

No.

Function

Page

Select to search by intersection.

Select to search by freeway
entrance/exit.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

2 Select “Emergency”.
3 Select the desired emergency category.
4 Select the desired destination.

SEARCHING BY
INTERSECTION AND
FREEWAY

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

SEARCHING BY
INTERSECTION

1 Select “Intersection”.
2 Enter the name of the first intersecting

SEARCHING BY FREEWAY
ENTRANCE/EXIT

3 Select the desired street name.
4 Enter the name of the second intersect-

1
2
3
4
5

5 Select the desired street name.

6 Select the desired entrance or exit

street which is located near the destination and select “OK”.

ing street and select “OK”.

 If the 2 streets cross at more than 1 intersection in a city, the list of intersections will
be displayed.

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Select “Freeway Entrance / Exit”.
Enter a freeway name and select “OK”.
Select the desired freeway.
Select “Entrance” or “Exit”.
Enter a freeway entrance or exit name
and select “OK”.
name.

INFORMATION

●Be sure to use the complete name of the
freeway or highway, including the hyphen,
when entering the destination. Freeways
and interstates use an “I” (I-405). US
highways use the state designation before
the number (CA-118).

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

SEARCHING BY MAP
By selecting “Map” the last displayed location is displayed again on the map
screen. You can search for a destination
from this map.

1 Display the “Destination” screen.
2 Select “Map”.
3 Scroll the map to the desired point and

1 Display the “Destination” screen.
(P. 88)

2 Select “Coordinates”.
3 Enter the latitude and longitude and select “OK”.

select “Go to ”.
“Adjust Location”: Select to adjust the position in smaller increments. (P. 79)
 If a destination has already been set, “Go to
” and “Add to Route” will be displayed.

“Go to ”: Select to delete the existing destination(s) and set a new one.
“Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.
 The navigation system performs a search
for the route and the entire route map is
displayed. (P. 100)

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

(P. 88)

SEARCHING BY
COORDINATES

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

2. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE
When the destination is set, the confirm
destination screen will be displayed.

1 Select “Go” on the confirm destination
screen.

 For details about this screen: P. 101

2 Select “OK” on the entire route map
screen.

 For details about this screen: P. 101

CAUTION
●Be sure to obey traffic regulations and
keep road conditions in mind while driving. If a traffic sign on the road has been
changed, the route guidance may not
indicate such changed information.

100

LS460_600h_Navi_U

INFORMATION

●The route for returning may not be the
same as that for going.
●The route guidance to the destination
may not be the shortest route or a route
without traffic congestion.
●Route guidance may not be available if
there is no road data for the specified
location.
●When setting the destination on a map
with a scale more than 0.5 mile (800 m),
the map scale changes to 0.5 mile (800
m) automatically. If this occurs, set the
destination again.
●If a destination that is not located on a
road is set, the vehicle will be guided to
the point on a road nearest to the destination. The road nearest to the selected
point is set as the destination.

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

CONFIRM DESTINATION
SCREEN

ENTIRE ROUTE MAP SCREEN

No.

Function
Select to adjust the position in smaller increments. (P. 79)
Select to register as a memory point.
Select to search for the route.
(P. 100)
If a destination has already been set,
“Go Directly” and “Add to Route”
will be displayed.
“Go Directly”: Select to delete the
existing destination(s) and set a new
one.
“Add to Route”: Select to add a destination.
Select to call the registered number.

Information/Function
Select the desired route from 3 possible routes. (P. 102)
Select to change the route.
(P. 104)
Select to display a list of the turns required to reach the destination.
(P. 103)
Current position
Destination point
Type of route and its distance
Distance of the entire route
 Select to start guidance.
 Select and hold to start demo
mode. (P. 102)

101

LS460_600h_Navi_U

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

No.

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

STARTING DEMO MODE
Before starting the route guidance, the
demonstration of the route guidance
can be viewed.

3 ROUTES SELECTION

1 Select “Three Routes”.
2 Select the desired route.

1 Select and hold “OK” on the entire
route map screen until a beep sounds.

 During demo mode, “Demo” is displayed
on the map screen.
 To end demo mode: Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch.
No.

Function
Select to display the quickest route.
Select to display the alternative
route.
Select to display the route that is the
shortest distance to the set destination.
Select to display the information
about the 3 routes. (P. 103)

102

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

■ DISPLAYING 3 ROUTES INFORMATION

1 Select “Info”.
2 Check that the “Information for Three
Routes” screen is displayed.

A list of turn information from the current position to the destination can be
displayed.

1 Select “Turn List”.
2 Check that the turn list is displayed.

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

No.

DISPLAYING TURN LIST

Information
Time necessary for the entire trip
Distance of the entire trip
Distance of the toll road
Distance of the freeway
Distance of the ferry trip

No.

Information
Current position
Distance to the next turn
Turn direction at the intersection
Select to display the map of the selected point.

INFORMATION

●However, not all road names on the route
may appear on the list. If a road changes
its name without requiring a turn (such as
on a street that runs through 2 or more
cities), the name change will not appear
on the list. The street names will be displayed in order from the starting point,
along with the distance to the next turn.

103

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. DESTINATION SEARCH

EDITING ROUTE
Destinations can be added, reordered
or deleted, and conditions for the route
to the destination can be changed.

1 Select “Edit Route”.
2 Select the desired item.

No.

Function

Page

Select to add destinations.

112

Select to delete destinations.

113

Select to reorder destinations.

112

Select to set route preferences.

113

Select to change route
type.

113

INFORMATION

●Even if the “Freeways” indicator is
dimmed, the route cannot avoid including
a freeway in some cases. (P. 113)
●If the calculated route includes a trip by
ferry, the route guidance shows a sea
route. After traveling by ferry, the current
position may be incorrect. Upon reception of GPS signals, it is automatically
corrected.

104

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

1. ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN
During the route guidance, various
types of guidance screens can be displayed depending on conditions.

SCREEN FOR ROUTE
GUIDANCE

CHANGING ROUTE
INFORMATION BAR
When the vehicle is on the guidance
route, the route information bar displays
the current street name or the distance
with the estimated travel/arrival time to
the destination.
the route information button ( ) to
change the display of the route information bar.

No.

Information
Distance to the next turn and an arrow indicating the turning direction
Guidance route
Current position
Current street name or route information

INFORMATION

●If the vehicle goes off the guidance route,
the route is searched again.
●For some areas, the roads have not been
completely digitized in our database. For
this reason, the route guidance may
select a road that should not be traveled
on.
●When arriving at the set destination the
destination name will be displayed on the
upper part of the screen.

No.

Information
Select to change the display between the estimated travel time and
the estimated arrival time.
“Arrival Time”: Select to display the
estimated arrival time.
“Time to Dest.”: Select to display the
estimated travel time.
Select to change the display between the current street name and
the distance with the estimated travel/arrival time.

105

LS460_600h_Navi_U

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1 Select the route information bar ( ) or

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

INFORMATION

●When the vehicle is on the guidance
route, the distance measured along the
route is displayed. Travel time and arrival
time are calculated based on the average
speed for the specified speed limit.
●When the vehicle gets off the guidance
route, the arrow facing the destination is
displayed instead of the estimated travel/
arrival time.
●The route information bar fills from left to
right as the vehicle progresses on the
route.

DISTANCE AND TRAVEL/
ARRIVAL TIME
When driving on the guidance route
with more than 1 destination set, a list of
the distance with estimated travel/arrival time from the current position to each
destination is displayed.

1 Select the route information bar.

2 Check that the list of the distance and
time is displayed.

 By selecting one of the number buttons, the
desired route information is displayed.

106

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

ROUTE OVERVIEW

DURING FREEWAY DRIVING

The entire route from the current position to the destination can be displayed
during the route guidance.

During freeway driving, the freeway information screen will be displayed.

1 Select

on the map screen.

(P. 72)

played.

 For details about this screen: P. 101

No./
Icon

Information/Function
Distance and time from the current
position to the road traffic facilities.
Name of the road traffic facilities.
POIs that are close to a freeway exit
Select to display the selected map of
the exit vicinity.
Select to display the nearest road
traffic facilities from the current position.
Select to scroll to farther road traffic
facilities.
Select to scroll to closer road traffic
facilities.

INFORMATION

●When the map screen is set to full screen
display, the freeway information screen
will be displayed on the “Side Display”.

107

LS460_600h_Navi_U

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

2 Select “Route Overview”.
3 Check that the entire route map is dis-

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

WHEN APPROACHING
FREEWAY EXIT OR
JUNCTION
When the vehicle approaches an exit or
junction, the freeway guidance screen
will be displayed.

TOLLGATE GUIDANCE
When the vehicle approaches a tollgate,
the tollgate view will be displayed.

No.

Information/Function
Next exit or junction name
Distance from the current position to
the exit or junction
Select to hide the freeway guidance
screen.
To return to the freeway guidance
screen, press the “MAP” button on
the Remote Touch.
Remaining distance bar to the guidance point

108

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Information/Function
Distance from the current position to
the tollgate
Select to hide the tollgate guidance
screen.
To return to the tollgate guidance
screen, press the “MAP” button on
the Remote Touch.
Remaining distance bar to the guidance point

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

REAL FREEWAY JUNCTION
VIEW
When the vehicle approaches a junction, the junction view with signage will
be displayed.

WHEN APPROACHING
INTERSECTION
When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the intersection guidance
screen will be displayed.
3

Information/Function
Next junction or street name
Select to hide the real freeway junction view.
To return to the real freeway junction
view, press the “MAP” button on the
Remote Touch.

No.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

No.

Information/Function
Next street name
Select to hide the intersection guidance screen.
To return to the intersection guidance screen, press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch.

Distance from the current position to
the next junction

Distance to the intersection

Remaining distance bar to the guidance point

Remaining distance bar to the guidance point
INFORMATION

●When the map screen is set to full screen
display, the intersection guidance screen
will be displayed on the “Side Display”.

109

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

TURN LIST SCREEN

1 Select “Turn List” on the “Map Mode”
screen. (P. 78)

2 Check that the turn list screen is displayed.

TURN-BY-TURN ARROW
SCREEN
On this screen, information about the
next turn on the guidance route can be
displayed.

1 Select “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” on the
“Map Mode” screen. (P. 78)

2 Check that the turn-by-turn arrow
screen is displayed.

No.

Information
Turn direction
Distance between turns
Next street or destination name

No.

Information
Exit number or street name

INFORMATION

●When the map screen is set to full screen
display, the turn list screen will be displayed on the “Side Display”.

Turn direction
Distance to the next turn
INFORMATION

●When the map screen is set to full screen
display, the turn-by-turn arrow screen will
be displayed on the “Side Display”.

110

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

2. TYPICAL VOICE GUIDANCE PROMPTS
As the vehicle approaches an intersection, or point, where maneuvering the
vehicle is necessary, the system’s voice
guidance will provide various messages.
CAUTION
3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

●Be sure to obey the traffic regulations and
keep the road condition in mind especially when you are driving on IPD roads
(roads that are not completely digitized in
our database). The route guidance may
not have the updated information such as
the direction of a one way street.
INFORMATION

●To hear a voice guidance command again
if it cannot be heard, press the “MAP”
button on the Remote Touch.
●To adjust the voice guidance volume:
P. 63
●Voice guidance may be made early or
late.
●If the system cannot determine the current position correctly, you may not hear
voice guidance or may not see the magnified intersection on the screen.

111

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

3. EDITING ROUTE
1 Select

ADDING DESTINATIONS

on the map screen.

(P. 72)

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112)
2 Select “Add”.
3 Search for an additional destination in

2 Select “Edit Route”.
3 Select the item to be set.

the same way as a destination search.
(P. 88)

4 Select “Add Destination Here” to insert
the new destination into the route.

No.

Function

Page

Select to add destinations.

112

Select to delete destinations.

113

Select to reorder destinations.

112

Select to set route preferences.

113

Select to change route
type.

113

Select to set detours.

114

Select to start from adjacent road.

115

4 Check that the entire route map is displayed. (P. 101)

112

LS460_600h_Navi_U

REORDERING
DESTINATIONS
When more than 1 destination has been
set, the arrival order of the destinations
can be changed.

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112)
2 Select “Reorder”.
3 Select the desired destination and se-

lect “Move Up” or “Move Down” to
change the arrival order. Then select
“OK”.

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

DELETING DESTINATIONS

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112)
2 Select “Delete”.
3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

“Delete All”: Select to delete all destinations on the list.
 If more than 1 destination has been set, the
system will recalculate the route(s) to the
set destination(s) as necessary.

The conditions to determine the route
can be selected from various choices
such as freeways, toll roads, ferries, etc.

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112)
2 Select “Preferences”.
3 Select the desired route preferences
and select “OK”.

 When set to on, the indicator will illuminate.

SELECTING ROUTE TYPE

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112)
2 Select “Route Type”.
3 Select the desired route type and select
“OK”.

 During driving, the route guidance starts
after selecting the desired route type.

4 The entire route from the starting point
to the destination is displayed.

 For details about this screen: P. 101

113

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

 When more than 1 destination has been set,
a list will be displayed on the screen. Select
the item(s) to be deleted.

SETTING ROUTE
PREFERENCES

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

DETOUR SETTING

INFORMATION

During the route guidance, the route
can be changed to detour around a section of the route where a delay is caused
by road repairs, an accident, etc.

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112)
2 Select “Detour”.
3 Select the desired detour distance.

No.

Function
Select to detour within 1 mile of the
current position.
Select to detour within 3 miles of the
current position.
Select to detour within 5 miles of the
current position.
Select to detour on the entire route.

Select to make the system search for
the route based on traffic congestion
information received from traffic information. (P. 85)

*: This function is not made available on some
models.

114

LS460_600h_Navi_U

●This picture shows an example of how the
system would guide around a delay
caused by a traffic jam.
This position indicates the location of a
traffic jam caused by road repairs, an accident, etc.
This route indicates the detour suggested by the system.
●When the vehicle is on a freeway, the
detour distance selections are 5, 15 and
25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units are
in km).
●The system may not be able to calculate a
detour route depending on the selected
distance and surrounding road conditions.

3. ROUTE GUIDANCE

STARTING FROM ADJACENT
ROAD
When a freeway and a surface road run
in parallel, the system may show the
guidance route going on the freeway
while driving on the surface road, or vice
versa.
If this happens, you can instantly choose
the adjacent road for the route guidance.

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1 Display the “Route” screen. (P. 112)
2 Select “Start from Adjacent Road”.
INFORMATION

●When there is no adjacent road, this
screen button will not be displayed.

115

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4. MEMORY POINTS

1. MEMORY POINTS SETTINGS
Home, preset destinations, address
book entries, areas to avoid can be set
as memory points. The registered points
can be used as the destinations.
(P. 88)
Registered areas to avoid, will be avoided when the system searches for a route.

4 Select the desired item to be set.

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “Navigation”.

116

LS460_600h_Navi_U

No.

Function

Page

Select to set home.

117

Select to set preset destinations.

118

Select to set the address
book.

120

Select to set areas to avoid.

123

Select to delete previous
destinations.

125

Select to set detailed navigation settings.

126

4. MEMORY POINTS

EDITING HOME

SETTING UP HOME
If home has been registered, that information can be recalled by selecting “Go
Home” on the “Destination” screen.
(P. 90)

1 Select “Edit”.
2 Select the desired item to be edited.
3

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”
2 Select “Home”.
3 Select the desired item to be set.
No.

No.

Function

Page

Select to register home.

117

Select to edit home.

117

Select to delete home.

117

REGISTERING HOME

1 Select “Set Home Location”.
2 Select the desired item to search for the
location. (P. 88)

3 Select “OK” when the editing home

Function

Page

Select to edit the home
name.

122

Select to set display of the
home name on/off.



Select to edit location information.

122

Select to edit the phone
number.

122

Select to change the icon to
be displayed on the map
screen.

121

3 Select “OK”.
DELETING HOME

1 Select “Delete”.
2 Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

screen appears.

117

LS460_600h_Navi_U

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

screen. (P. 116)

4. MEMORY POINTS

REGISTERING PRESET
DESTINATIONS

SETTING UP PRESET
DESTINATIONS
If a preset destination has been registered, that information can be recalled
by using preset destinations on the
“Destination” screen. (P. 90)

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”
screen. (P. 116)

1 Select “Set”.
2 Select the desired item to search for the
location. (P. 88)

3 Select a position for this preset destination.

4 Select “OK” when the editing preset
destination screen appears. (P. 119)

2 Select “Preset Destinations”.
3 Select the desired item.

INFORMATION

●Up to 5 preset destinations can be registered.

No.

Function

Page

Select to register a preset
destination.

118

Select to edit a preset destination.

119

Select to delete a preset
destination.

119

118

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4. MEMORY POINTS

EDITING PRESET
DESTINATIONS

DELETING PRESET
DESTINATIONS

1 Select “Edit”.
2 Select the desired preset destination.
3 Select the item to be edited.

1 Select “Delete”.
2 Select the preset destination to be deleted and select “Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation

No.

Function

Page

Select to edit the preset
destination name.

122

Select to set display of the
preset destination name
on/off.



Select to edit location information.

122

Select to edit the phone
number.

122

Select to change the icon to
be displayed on the map
screen.

121

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

screen appears.

4 Select “OK”.

119

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4. MEMORY POINTS

SETTING UP ADDRESS BOOK
Points on the map can be registered.

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”
screen. (P. 116)

REGISTERING ADDRESS
BOOK ENTRIES

1 Select “New”.
2 Select the desired item to search for the
location. (P. 88)

2 Select “Address Book”.
3 Select the desired item.

3 Select “OK” when the editing address
book entry screen appears. (P. 121)

INFORMATION

●Up to 100 address book entries can be
registered.

No.

Function

Page

Select to register address
book entries.

120

Select to edit address book
entries.

121

Select to delete address
book entries.

122

120

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4. MEMORY POINTS

■ CHANGING THE ICON

EDITING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRIES
The icon, name, location and/or phone
number of a registered address book
entry can be edited.

1 Select “Edit” next to the “Icon”.
2 Select the desired icon.

1 Select “Edit”.
2 Select the desired address book entry.
3 Select the item to be edited.

“With Sound”: Select the memory points
with a sound
When the “With Sound” tab is selected
No.

Function

Page

Select to edit the address
book entry name.

122

Select to set display of the
address book entry name
on/off.



Select to edit location information.

122

Select to edit the phone
number.

122

Select to change the icon to
be displayed on the map
screen.

121

A sound for some address book entries
can be set. When the vehicle approaches the location of the address book entry, the selected sound will be heard.

1 Select the “With Sound” tab.
2 Select the desired sound icon.
: Select to play the sound.
 When “Bell (with Direction)” is selected,
select an arrow to adjust the direction and
select “OK”.
INFORMATION

●The bell sounds only when the vehicle
approaches this point in the direction that
has been set.

4 Select “OK”.

121

LS460_600h_Navi_U

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

 Change pages by selecting the “Page 1”,
“Page 2” or “With Sound” tab.

4. MEMORY POINTS

■ CHANGING THE NAME

1 Select “Edit” next to “Name”.
2 Enter a name and select “OK”.
■ CHANGING THE LOCATION

1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”.
2 Scroll the map to the desired point (P.
79) and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING PHONE NUMBER

1 Select “Edit” next to “Phone #”.
2 Enter the phone number and select
“OK”.

122

LS460_600h_Navi_U

DELETING ADDRESS BOOK
ENTRIES

1 Select “Delete”.
2 Select the item to be deleted and select
“Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

4. MEMORY POINTS

REGISTERING AREAS TO
AVOID

SETTING UP AREAS TO
AVOID
Areas to be avoided because of traffic
jams, construction work or other reasons can be registered as “Areas to
Avoid”.
screen. (P. 116)

location. (P. 88)

3 Select either

or
to
change the size of the area to be avoided and select “OK”.

2 Select “Areas to Avoid”.
3 Select the desired item.

4 Select “OK” when the editing area to
avoid screen appears.

No.

Function

Page

Select to register areas to
avoid.

123

Select to edit areas to
avoid.

124

Select to delete areas to
avoid.

124

INFORMATION

●If a destination is entered in the area to
avoid or the route calculation cannot be
made without running through the area to
avoid, a route passing through the area to
be avoided may be shown.
●Up to 10 locations can be registered as
points/areas to avoid.

123

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”

1 Select “New”.
2 Select the desired item to search for the

4. MEMORY POINTS

EDITING AREAS TO AVOID
The name, location and/or area size of a
registered area can be edited.

■ CHANGING THE NAME

1 Select “Edit” next to “Name”.
2 Enter a name and select “OK”.
■ CHANGING THE LOCATION

1 Select “Edit”.
2 Select the area and select “OK”.
3 Select the item to be edited.

1 Select “Edit” next to “Location”.
2 Scroll the map to the desired point (P.
79) and select “OK”.

■ CHANGING THE AREA SIZE

1 Select “Edit” next to “Size”.
2 Select either

or
to
change the size of the area to be avoided and select “OK”.

No.

Function

Page

Select to edit the name of
the area to avoid.

124

Select to set display of the
area to avoid name on/off.



Select to edit area location.

124

Select to edit area size.

124

Select to set the area to
avoid function on/off.



4 Select “OK”.

124

LS460_600h_Navi_U

DELETING AREAS TO AVOID

1 Select “Delete”.
2 Select the area to be deleted and select
“Delete”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

4. MEMORY POINTS

DELETING PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS
Previous destinations can be deleted.

1 Display the “Navigation Settings”
screen. (P. 116)

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

2 Select “Delete Previous Dest.”.
3 Select the previous destination to be deleted and select “Delete”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

125

LS460_600h_Navi_U

5. SETUP

1. DETAILED NAVIGATION SETTINGS
Settings are available for pop-up information, favorite POI categories, low fuel
warning, etc.

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

2
3
4
5

Select “Setup”.
Select “Navigation”.
Select “Detailed Navi. Settings”.
Select the items to be set.

126

LS460_600h_Navi_U

SCREENS FOR NAVIGATION
SETTINGS

5. SETUP

No.

Function

Page



Select to set display of popup information on/off.



Select to set favorite POI
categories that are used for
POI selection to display on
the map screen.

127

Select to set display of low
fuel warning on/off.

128

Select to set IPD road guidance on/off.



Select to set the voice guidance for the next street
name on/off.



Select to set display of the
3D city model map on/off.



Select to change the viewing angle of the 3D map.

128

Select to adjust the current
position mark manually or
to adjust miscalculation of
the distance caused by tire
replacement.

129

Select to reset all setup
items.



Up to 6 POI icons, which are used for
selecting POIs on the map screen, can
be selected as favorites.

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”

2 Select “Favorite POI Categories”.
3 Select the category to be changed.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

Select to set the automatic
screen button hiding function on/off. When set to on,
certain screen buttons on
the map screen will disappear several seconds after
the Remote Touch has
been operated. When set
to off, all the screen buttons
will always be displayed.

FAVORITE POI CATEGORIES
(SELECT POI ICONS)

screen. (P. 126)

“Default”: Select to set the default categories.

4 Select the desired POI category.
“List All Categories”: Select to display all
POI categories.

5 Select the desired POI icon.

127

LS460_600h_Navi_U

5. SETUP

LOW FUEL WARNING
When the fuel level is low, a warning
message will pop up on the screen.

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”
screen. (P. 126)

2 Select “Low Fuel Warning”.
3 Select “On” or “Off”.

CHANGING VIEWING
ANGLE OF 3D MAP

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”
screen. (P. 126)

2 Select “3D Map Viewing Angle”.
3 Select “Up” or “Down” to change the
viewing angle.

■ SEARCHING GAS STATION IN
LOW FUEL WARNING
A nearby gas station can be selected as
a destination.

1 Select “Yes” when the low fuel warning
appears.

2 Select the desired nearby gas station.
3 Select “Enter ” to set as a destination.
“Info”: Select to display gas station information. (P. 83)

128

LS460_600h_Navi_U

“Default”: Select to set the initial angle.

5. SETUP

CURRENT POSITION/TIRE
CHANGE CALIBRATION
The current position mark can be adjusted manually. Miscalculation of the distance caused by tire replacement can
also be adjusted.
screen. (P. 126)

2 Select “Calibration”.
3 Select the desired item.

1 Select “Tire Change”.
 The message appears and the quick distance calibration starts automatically.
INFORMATION

 For additional information on the accuracy of a current position: P. 132

■ POSITION/DIRECTION
BRATION

The tire change calibration function will
be used when replacing the tires. This
function will adjust miscalculation
caused by the circumference difference
between the old and new tires.

●If this procedure is not performed when
the tires are replaced, the current position mark may be incorrectly displayed.

CALI-

When driving, the current position mark
will be automatically corrected by GPS
signals. If GPS reception is poor due to
location, the current position mark can
be adjusted manually.

1 Select “Position / Direction”.
2 Scroll the map to the desired point (P.
79) and select “OK”.

3 Select an arrow to adjust the direction of

the current position mark and select
“OK”.

129

LS460_600h_Navi_U

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1 Display the “Detailed Navi. Settings”

■ TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION

5. SETUP

2. TRAFFIC SETTINGS*
Traffic information such as traffic congestion or traffic incident warnings can
be made available.

SCREEN FOR TRAFFIC
SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

No.

Function
Select to set the avoid traffic function
auto/manual. (P. 131)

2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “Traffic”.
4 Select the items to be set.

Select to set the usage of traffic information for the estimated arrival time
on/off.
Select to set the display of an arrow
of free flowing traffic on/off.
Select to set to on/off whether to
consider the predictive traffic information (P. 86) with estimated arrival time and detoured route search.
Select to set traffic incident voice
warning on/off.
Select to reset all setup items.

*: This function is not made available on some models.
130

LS460_600h_Navi_U

5. SETUP

AUTO AVOID TRAFFIC

1 Display the “Traffic Settings” screen.
(P. 130)

2 Select “Avoid Traffic”.
3 Select the desired item.

Function
Select to automatically change
routes when congestion information
of the guidance route has been received.
Select to select manually whether or
not to change routes when congestion information of the guidance
route has been received. In this
mode, a screen will appear to ask if
you wish to reroute.

When the navigation system calculates
a new route, the following screen will be
displayed.

1 Select the desired item.

No.

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

No.

■ CHANGING THE ROUTE MANUALLY

Function
Select to start route guidance using
the new route.
Select to confirm the new route and
current route on the map.
Select to continue the current route
guidance.

Select to not reroute when congestion information for the guidance
route has been received.

131

LS460_600h_Navi_U

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

1. GPS (GLOBAL POSITIONING SYSTEM)
LIMITATIONS OF THE
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
This navigation system calculates the
current position using satellite signals,
various vehicle signals, map data, etc.
However, an accurate position may not
be shown depending on satellite conditions, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) developed and operated by the U.S. Department of Defense provides an accurate
current position, normally using 4 or more
satellites, and in some case 3 satellites. The
GPS system has a certain level of inaccuracy. While the navigation system compensates for this most of the time, occasional
positioning errors of up to 300 ft. (100 m)
can and should be expected. Generally, position errors will be corrected within a few
seconds.

132

LS460_600h_Navi_U

When the vehicle is receiving signals from
satellites, the “GPS” mark appears at the
top left of the screen.
The GPS signal may be physically obstructed, leading to inaccurate vehicle position on
the map screen. Tunnels, tall buildings,
trucks, or even the placement of objects on
the instrument panel may obstruct the GPS
signals.
The GPS satellites may not send signals due
to repairs or improvements being made to
them.
Even when the navigation system is receiving clear GPS signals, the vehicle position
may not be shown accurately or inappropriate route guidance may occur in some cases.
NOTICE
●The installation of window tinting may
obstruct the GPS signals. Most window
tinting contains some metallic content
that will interfere with GPS signal reception of the antenna in the instrument
panel. We advise against the use of window tinting on vehicles equipped with
navigation systems.

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

 If the vehicle cannot receive GPS signals,
the current position can be adjusted
manually. For information on setting the
current position calibration: P. 129

 Inappropriate route guidance may occur in
the following cases:
• When turning at an intersection off the
designated route guidance.
• If you set more than 1 destination but skip
any of them, auto reroute will display a
route returning to the destination on the
previous route.
• When turning at an intersection for which 3
there is no route guidance.
• When passing through an intersection for
which there is no route guidance.
• During auto reroute, the route guidance
may not be available for the next turn to
the right or left.
• During high speed driving, it may take a
long time for auto reroute to operate. In
auto reroute, a detour route may be
shown.
• After auto reroute, the route may not be
changed.
• If an unnecessary U-turn is shown or
announced.
• If a location has multiple names and the
system announces 1 or more of them.
• When a route cannot be searched.
• If the route to your destination includes
gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the route
guidance may not be shown.
• Your destination point might be shown on
the opposite side of the street.
• When a portion of the route has regulations prohibiting the entry of the vehicle
that vary by time, season or other reasons.
• The road and map data stored in the navigation system may not be complete or
may not be the latest version.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM

 Accurate current position may not be
shown in the following cases:
• When driving on a small angled Y-shaped
road.
• When driving on a winding road.
• When driving on a slippery road such as
in sand, gravel, snow, etc.
• When driving on a long straight road.
• When freeway and surface streets run in
parallel.
• After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.
• When a long route is searched during
high speed driving.
• When driving without setting the current
position calibration correctly.
• After repeating a change of direction by
going forward and backward, or turning
on a turntable in a parking lot.
• When leaving a covered parking lot or
parking garage.
• When a roof carrier is installed.
• When driving with tire chains installed.
• When the tires are worn.
• After replacing a tire or tires.
• When using tires that are smaller or
larger than the factory specifications.
• When the tire pressure in any of the 4
tires is not correct.

 After replacing a tire: P. 129

133

LS460_600h_Navi_U

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

INFORMATION

●This navigation system uses tire turning
data and is designed to work with factoryspecified tires for the vehicle. Installing
tires that are larger or smaller than the
originally equipped diameter may cause
inaccurate display of the current position.
The tire pressure also affects the diameter of the tires, so make sure that the tire
pressure of all 4 tires is correct.

134

LS460_600h_Navi_U

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

2. MAP DATABASE VERSION AND COVERED AREA
ABOUT THE MAP DATA

Coverage areas and legal information
can be displayed and map data can be
updated.

Map data for the navigation system is
contained in a microSD card that is inserted in the microSD card slot located
at the bottom of the audio control panel.
Do not eject the microSD card, as doing
so may deactivate the navigation system.

1 Select

on the map screen.

(P. 72)

2 Select “Map Data”.
3 Check that the map data screen is displayed.

No.

Function
Map version
Select to update map.
Select to display map coverage areas.

NOTICE
●Do not edit or delete the map data on the
microSD card, as doing so may deactivate the navigation system.
INFORMATION

Select to display legal information.
INFORMATION

●Map data updates are available for a fee.
Contact your Lexus dealer for further
information.

●microSDHC Logo is a trademark of SD3C,LLC.

135

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3
NAVIGATION SYSTEM

MAP INFORMATION

6. TIPS FOR THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM

136

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
1

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
2

BASIC OPERATION

2. XM Satellite Radio...................................... 161
OVERVIEW................................................................. 161

1. QUICK REFERENCE ............................ 140

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO
AN XM Satellite Radio ....................................... 163

2. SOME BASICS ......................................... 142

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID .......................... 165

TURNING THE SYSTEM
ON AND OFF ....................................................... 142

SELECTING A CHANNEL FROM
THE LIST.................................................................... 165

SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE ............. 143
DISC SLOT.................................................................. 144

IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
MALFUNCTIONS .............................................. 166

USB/AUX PORT ..................................................... 145

3. INTERNET RADIO ................................... 167

“Sound Settings” SCREEN ................................... 146
AUDIO SCREEN ADJUSTMENT................... 148
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM........................ 150

2 RADIO OPERATION
1. AM/FM RADIO.................................................. 151

LISTENING TO INTERNET RADIO.............. 167

3 MEDIA OPERATION
1. CD.................................................................. 168 8
OVERVIEW................................................................ 168

OVERVIEW................................................................. 151

2. DVD................................................................. 171 9

PRESET BUTTON SCREEN .............................. 154

OVERVIEW.................................................................. 171

SELECTING A STATION FROM
THE LIST.................................................................... 155

DVD OPTIONS ........................................................ 174 10

CACHING A RADIO PROGRAM ............... 155
RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM ...... 157

3. USB MEMORY.......................................... 176
OVERVIEW................................................................ 176

USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY.......... 158

4. iPod ................................................................ 180

AVAILABLE HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY.................................................. 158

OVERVIEW............................................................... 180

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE ...................... 160

iPod AUDIO ............................................................... 183
iPod VIDEO ................................................................ 183

137

LS460_600h_Navi_U

5. Bluetooth® AUDIO................................. 184
OVERVIEW................................................................ 184

CONNECTING A Bluetooth® DEVICE..... 188
LISTENING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO............. 188

6. AUX.............................................................. 189

1. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM FEATURES............................ 216
QUICK REFERENCE............................................ 216

OVERVIEW................................................................ 189
EXTERNAL OPTIONS......................................... 192

REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM FEATURES

2. SOME BASICS.......................................... 219
USING THE REMOTE
CONTROLLER..................................................... 219

AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE
CONTROLS

TURNING ON/OFF THE REAR
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM....................... 220
INSERTING MEDIA OR
CONNECTING A DEVICE
TO THE REAR PLAYER .................................. 222

1. STEERING SWITCHES.......................... 193
2. REAR SEAT AUDIO
CONTROLS............................................ 196

SELECTING THE SOUND MODE .............. 224
SELECTING THE SOURCE ............................. 225
OPERATING REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FROM
THE FRONT SEATS........................................... 227

5 SETUP
1. AUDIO SETTINGS .................................. 199
AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN............................ 199

TIPS FOR OPERATING THE
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM OPERATION

1. AM/FM/SAT RADIO............................ 228
OVERVIEW.............................................................. 228

1. OPERATING INFORMATION ........ 204
RADIO......................................................................... 204
DVD PLAYER AND DISC ................................ 205
iPod.................................................................................. 210
FILE INFORMATION.............................................. 211
TERMS........................................................................... 213
ERROR MESSAGES.............................................. 215

138

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. CD ................................................................ 229
OVERVIEW............................................................... 229

3. VIDEO CD................................................. 232
OVERVIEW............................................................... 232
VIDEO CD OPTIONS........................................ 233

4. DVD (DVD VIDEO AND
AVCHD DISC)................................... 235
OVERVIEW.............................................................. 235

SETUP FOR REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

1. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
4
SYSTEM SETTINGS............................ 272
DISPLAYING THE SETTING SCREEN...... 272

DVD VIDEO OPTIONS...................................... 237
AVCHD VIDEO OPTIONS ........................... 241

5. Blu-ray Disc
(BD-Video AND BDAV)..................... 242

TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR
10 SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM

OVERVIEW............................................................... 242

1. OPERATING INFORMATION......... 275 7

BD-VIDEO OPTIONS ......................................... 244

CAUTION SCREEN............................................. 276

BDAV OPTIONS................................................... 248

WHEN
APPEARS ON
THE SCREEN........................................................ 276

6. USB MEMORY........................................ 250
OVERVIEW.............................................................. 250

THE REMOTE CONTROLLER....................... 276
HEADPHONES....................................................... 277

7. iPod ............................................................... 253

VOLUME.................................................................... 277

OVERVIEW.............................................................. 253

COPYRIGHTS AND TRADEMARKS........ 278

iPod AUDIO ............................................................. 255

CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc PLAYER
10
AND DISCS .......................................................... 282

8. Bluetooth® AUDIO ................................ 256
OVERVIEW.............................................................. 256

SD CARD..................................................................... 291
A/V INPUT PORT ................................................. 296

Bluetooth® AUDIO............................................... 258

9. SD CARD ................................................... 259
SELECTING THE SD MODE.......................... 259
MUSIC......................................................................... 260
PICTURE .................................................................... 263
VIDEO/MOVIE....................................................... 266
VIDEO (SD AVCHD)....................................... 269

10. EXTERNAL DEVICES............................ 271
OVERVIEW................................................................ 271

139

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC OPERATION

1. QUICK REFERENCE
The audio control screen can be reached by the following methods:
Using the instrument panel
Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” button.
From the “Menu” screen
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Radio” or “Media”.
The audio functions can also be displayed and operated on the “Side Display”.
(P. 413)
Some audio functions can also be operated from the rear seat.
(P. 216)
■ CONTROL SCREEN

140

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC OPERATION

■ CONTROL PANEL

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Function

Page

Using the radio

151

Playing an audio CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc

168

Playing a DVD

171

Playing a USB memory

176

Playing an iPod®

180

Playing a Bluetooth® device

184

Using the AUX port

189

Using the steering wheel audio switches

193

Using the rear seat audio controls*

196

Audio system settings

199

Using the rear seat entertainment system*

216

*: If equipped
INFORMATION

●The display and button positions will differ depending on the type of the system.

141

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC OPERATION

2. SOME BASICS
This section describes some of the basic
features of the audio/visual system.
Some information may not pertain to
your system.
Your audio/visual system works when
the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON
AND OFF

NOTICE
●To prevent the 12-volt battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio/visual
system on longer than necessary when
the engine is not running .

CERTIFICATION
CAUTION:
 For vehicles sold in U.S.A.:
Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
 Laser products
• USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF
PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY
RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
• THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL
INCREASE EYE HAZARD.

142

LS460_600h_Navi_U

“PWR·VOL” knob: Press to turn the audio/
visual system on and off. The system turns
on in the last mode used. Turn this knob to
adjust the volume.
“RADIO”, “MEDIA” button: Press to display screen buttons for the audio/visual system.
 A function that enables automatic return
to the previous screen from the audio/
visual screen can be selected. (P. 56)

1. BASIC OPERATION

SELECTING AN AUDIO
SOURCE

REORDERING THE AUDIO
SOURCE

1 Display the audio control screen.

2 Each time the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”

2 Select “Source”.
3 Select “Reorder”.
4 Select the desired audio source then

(P. 140)
Using the instrument panel

button is pressed, the audio source
changes.

(P. 140)

“<<” or “>>” to reorder.

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

“RADIO” button: To change radio modes.
“MEDIA” button: To change media modes.
From the audio source selection screen

2 Select “Source”.
3 Select the desired source.
INFORMATION

●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be operated.
●When there are two pages, select “ ” or
“ ” to change the page.
●When “Rear” is selected, the rear seat
entertainment system can be operated
from the front seats. (P. 227)

143

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC OPERATION

DISC SLOT
INSERTING A DISC

EJECTING A DISC

1 Press the

button and remove the

disc.

1 Insert a disc into the disc slot.

NOTICE
 After insertion, the disc is automatically
loaded.

●Never try to disassemble or oil any part of
the DVD player. Do not insert anything
other than a disc into the slot.
INFORMATION

●The player is intended for use with 4.7 in.
(12 cm) discs only.
●When inserting a disc, gently insert the
disc with the label facing up.

144

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC OPERATION

USB/AUX PORT
There are 2 USB ports and an AUX port
in the console box.

1 Open the console box, then open the

INFORMATION

●There are grooves in the tray allowing
audio devices and cellular phones to be
connected to the sockets while they are
on the tray in the console box.

cover and connect a USB memory.

 Turn on the power of the device if it is not
turned on.

2 Close the console box.
NOTICE
●Depending on the size and shape of the
device that is connected to the system,
the console box may not close fully. In this
case, do not forcibly close the console
box as this may damage the device or the
terminal, etc.

145

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

●If 2 devices are connected to the USB
ports, depending on the devices, both
may not be able to be recognized by the
system at the same time.

1. BASIC OPERATION

USING A 4-POLE AUX CABLE
To view a video on an iPod video or External video, it is necessary to use a 4pole AUX cable to connect the portable
audio device.
When connecting a portable audio device to the AUX port, use a 4-pole AUX
cable with a plug that matches the exact
layout shown in the illustration.

“Sound Settings” SCREEN

1 Display the audio control screen.
(P. 140).

2 Select
.
3 Select the desired tab to be set.

Connected device
(portable audio
device, etc.)
No.

Left Right Ground Video
audio audio

 When using an iPod video, a cable that has
a 4-pole AUX plug and a USB connector is
necessary. Connect the plug and connector to the AUX and USB ports.
INFORMATION

●If a 4-pole AUX cable with a different layout is used, audio and/or video may not
be output properly.

146

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Information

Page

Select to set the tone and
balance.

147

Select to set the DSP control.

148

Select to change audio settings.

199

1. BASIC OPERATION

TONE AND BALANCE

desired item to be set.

No.

Function
Select “+” or “-” to adjust highpitched tones.
Select “+” or “-” to adjust mid-pitched
tones.
Select “+” or “-” to adjust low-pitched
tones.
Select to adjust the sound balance
between the front and rear speakers.
Select to adjust the sound balance
between the left and right speakers.

147

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

TONE:
How good an audio program sounds is
largely determined by the mix of the treble, mid and bass levels. In fact, different
kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of
treble, mid and bass.
BALANCE:
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear
sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that when listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the
volume of 1 group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.

1 Select the “Sound” tab and select the

1. BASIC OPERATION

DSP CONTROL

1 Select the “DSP” tab and select the de-

AUDIO SCREEN
ADJUSTMENT

sired item to be set.

SCREEN SIZE SETTINGS
The screen size can be selected for each
type of media.
DVD video/iPod video/External video

1 Display the audio control screen.
(P. 140)

No.

Function
The system adjusts to the optimum
volume and tone quality according
to vehicle speed to compensate for
increased vehicle noise.

2 Select “Options”.
3 Select “Wide”.
4 Select the desired item to be adjusted.

This function can create a feeling of
presence.

No.

Function
Select to display a 4 : 3 screen, with
either side in black.
Select to enlarge the image horizontally and vertically to full screen.
Select to enlarge the image by the
same ratio horizontally and vertically.

148

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC OPERATION

The brightness, contrast, color and tone
of the screen can be adjusted.
DVD video/iPod video/External video

4 Select the desired item to be adjusted.
Screen button

Function

“Color” “R”

Select to strengthen the
red color of the screen.

“Color” “G”

Select to strengthen the
green color of the
screen.

“Tone” “+”

Select to strengthen the
tone of the screen.

“Tone” “-”

Select to weaken the
tone of the screen.

“Contrast” “+”

Select to strengthen the
contrast of the screen.

“Contrast” “-”

Select to weaken the
contrast of the screen.

“Brightness” “+”

Select to brighten the
screen.

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

CONTRAST, BRIGHTNESS,
COLOR AND TONE
ADJUSTMENT

“Brightness” “-”

Select to darken the
screen.

1 Display the audio control screen.
(P. 140)

2 Select “Options”.
3 Select “Display”.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the audio source, some
functions may not be available.

149

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. BASIC OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

1 Press this switch to operate the voice
command system.

 The voice command system and its list of
commands can be operated. (P. 298)

150

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. RADIO OPERATION

1. AM/FM RADIO
OVERVIEW
The radio operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143
■ CONTROL SCREEN

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

When “Options” is selected

151

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. RADIO OPERATION

■ CONTROL PANEL

No.

Function
Select to display HD) multicast channels available. (P. 158)
Select to display the cache radio operation buttons. (P. 155)
Select to display the radio preset buttons. (P. 154)
Select to display a list of receivable stations. (P. 155)
Select to store artist and song title information. (P. 159)
 Select to scan for receivable stations.
 When a program type is selected: Select to scan for receivable stations of the selected
program type/channel category.
Select to change the screen buttons (at the bottom of the screen) to the optional screen
buttons.
Select to seek a receivable station of the selected category.
Select to display the “Type List” screen. (P. 157)
Select to display text messages.
Analog FM only: Select to display RBDS text messages. (P. 157)
Select to turn HD Radio mode on/off.
When the “HD Radio” indicator is off, the station list shows only analog broadcasts.
Select to change the screen buttons (at the bottom of the screen) back to the standard
screen buttons.

152

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. RADIO OPERATION

No.

Function
 Turn to step up/down frequencies.
 Turn to move up/down the list.
Cache radio only: Press to turn mute on/off.
 Press to select a preset station.
 Press and hold to seek for a station.

INFORMATION

●The radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a stereo broadcast is received.
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
153

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. RADIO OPERATION

PRESET BUTTON SCREEN
Two preset button screens are available:
the “Mixed Presets” screen and “Individual Presets” screen.
On the “Mixed Presets” screen, preset
stations for all radio modes (AM, FM
and XM Satellite Radio modes) are displayed together.
On the “Individual Presets” screen, only
preset stations for the current radio
mode are displayed.

1 Select “Presets”.
2 Select the desired item.

INFORMATION

●On the “Mixed Presets” screen, up to 36
stations (6 stations per page x 6 pages)
can be set as presets.
On the “Individual Presets” screen, up to
another 12 AM stations, 12 FM stations,
and 12 XM Satellite Radio stations can be
set as presets. (Maximum 72 stations)

PRESETTING A STATION

1 Tune in the desired station.
2 Select “Presets”.
3 Select “add new”.
 To change the preset station to a different
one, select and hold the preset station.

4 Select “Yes” on the confirmation screen.
5 Select “OK” after setting the new preset
station.

INFORMATION

No.

Function
Select to tune in to the desired preset station/channel.
Select to change to the “Individual
Presets” screen. (On the “Individual
Presets” screen, select “Mixed Presets” to change to the “Mixed Presets” screen.
Select to display the control screen.

154

LS460_600h_Navi_U

●The number of preset radio stations displayed on the screen can be changed.
(P. 200)

2. RADIO OPERATION

SELECTING A STATION FROM
THE LIST

1 Select “Station List”.
2 FM radio only: Select the desired pro-

CACHING A RADIO
PROGRAM
A radio program can be cached and
played back in a time-shifted manner.

gram type.

3 Select the desired station.
“Info”: Select to display the control screen.

■ REFRESHING THE STATION LIST
screen and the following screen will be
displayed.
“Cancel Refresh”: Select to cancel the refresh.
“Source”: Select to change to another audio source while refreshing.

The broadcast cached in the program
cache can be played back manually.

1 Select

on the right side of the screen.

INFORMATION

●The audio system sound is muted during
refresh operation.
●In some situations, it may take some time
to update the station list.

155

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

1 Select “Refresh” on the “Station List”

PLAYING BACK THE CACHE
MANUALLY

2. RADIO OPERATION

2 Select the desired cache radio operation button.

AUTOMATIC PLAYBACK OF
THE CACHE
If the radio broadcast is interrupted by
another audio output, such as an
incoming phone call, the system will
automatically cache the interrupted
portion and perform time-shift playback
when the interruption ends. To manually
operate the cache operation: (P. 155)

No.

Function
Select: Skips backward 2 minutes
Select and hold: Fast rewinds continuously
Returns to the live radio broadcast
Pauses the playback (To restart, select

)

Select: Skips forward 2 minutes
Select and hold: Fast forwards continuously
Hides the cache operation buttons
Red vertical bar: Shows what portion
of the cached broadcast is currently
playing
Light blue bar: Shows time in which
cache writing is in progress

156

LS460_600h_Navi_U

INFORMATION

●The system can store up to 10 minutes.
Cached data will be erased when the
radio mode or station is changed or when
the audio system is turned off.
●If noise or silence occurs during the caching process, cache writing will continue,
with the noise or silence recorded as is. In
this case, the cached broadcast will contain the noise or silence when played
back.

2. RADIO OPERATION

RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM

SELECTING A DESIRED
PROGRAM TYPE

1 Select “Options”.
2 Select “Type”.
3 Select to select a program type/channel

4 Select “TYPE SEEK” and the system
will start to seek for stations in the relevant program type/channel category.

INFORMATION

●If no relevant program can be found, “no
type” will appear on the screen.

category.

157

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

This audio system is equipped with Radio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).
RBDS mode allows text messages to be
received from radio stations that utilize
RBDS transmitters.
When RBDS is on, the radio can
— only select stations of a particular program type,
— display messages from radio stations,
— search for a stronger signal station.
RBDS features are available only when
listening to an FM station that
broadcasts RBDS information and the
“FM Info” indicator is on.

 Once a program type has been set, “TYPE
SEEK” will appear on the screen.
 The program list is in the following order:
• “Classical”
• “Country”
• “EasyLis” (Easy Listening)
• “Inform” (Information)
• “Jazz”
• “News”
• “Oldies”
• “Other”
4
• “Pop Music”
• “Religion”
• “Rock”
• “R&B” (Rhythm and Blues)
• “Sports”
• “Talk”
• “Traffic” (Not available when “HD Radio”
indicator is off.)
• “Alert” (Emergency Alert)

2. RADIO OPERATION

USING HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver
which allows it to receive digital broadcasts (where available) in addition to the
analog broadcasts it already receives.
Digital broadcasts have better sound
quality than analog broadcasts as digital
broadcasts provide free, crystal clear
audio with no static or distortion. For
more information, and a guide to available radio stations and programming,
refer to www.hdradio.com.
HD Radio features included in Lexus
radios:
 Digital Sound  HD Radio broadcasts
deliver crystal-clear, digital audio quality
to listeners.
 HD2/HD3 Channels  FM stations can
provide additional digital only audio programming with expanded content and
format choices on HD2/HD3 channels.
 PSD  Program Service Data (PSD)
gives you on-screen information such as
artist name and song title.
 iTunes Tagging  Listeners can tag
(store) songs they like for later review and
purchase through iTunes.
 Artist Experience  Images related to
the broadcast are displayed on the radio
screen, such as album cover art and station logos.

158

LS460_600h_Navi_U

HD Radio Technology manufactured
under license from iBiquity Digital
Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.
HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and
“Arc” logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp.

AVAILABLE HD Radio™
TECHNOLOGY
MULTICAST
On the FM radio frequency most digital
stations have “multiple” or supplemental
programs on one FM station.

1 Select the “HD)” logo.

2 Select the desired channel.
 Turning the “TUNE·SCROLL” knob can
also select the desired multicast channel.

2. RADIO OPERATION

PRESERVING A MUSIC
INFORMATION
Tag information in the music broadcasting is preserved in the system and transmits to an iPod.

1 Select “Tag” to bookmark the music information.

2 Connect an iPod. (P. 145)

●The tag information can not be preserved
while scanning or caching the radio station.
●If tagging the music information fails,
“Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will be
displayed on the screen. If this occurs, tag
the information again.
●HD Radio™ stations can be preset.
●An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be
displayed on the screen when in digital.
The “HD)” logo will first appear in a gray
color indicating the station is indeed (an
analog and) a digital station. Once the
digital signal is acquired, the logo will
change to a bright orange color.
●The song title, artist name and music
genre will appear on the screen when
available by the radio station. In addition,
radios stations may send album cover
pictures when available.
●As a user works through the analog radio
stations, (where applicable) the radio
receiver will automatically tune from an
analog signal to a digital signal within 5
seconds.

159

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

 Turn on the power of the iPod if it is not
turned on.
 Once an iPod is connected, the music tag
moves from the radio into the iPod.
 When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the
“tagged” information of the songs which
were tagged while listening to the radio can
be viewed. Then a user may decide to purchase the song or CD/Album which had
been listened to on their radio.

INFORMATION

2. RADIO OPERATION

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Experience

Cause

Action

Mismatch of time alignment- a user may hear a
short period of programming replayed or an echo,
stutter or skip.

The radio stations analog
and digital volume is not
properly aligned or the station is in ballgame mode.

None, radio broadcast issue. A
user can contact the radio station.

Sound fades, blending in
and out.

Radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.

Reception issue, may clear-up as
the vehicle continues to be driven.
Turning the indicator of the “HD
Radio” button off can force radio in
an analog audio.

Audio mute condition
when an HD2/HD3 multicast channel had been playing.

The radio does not have access to digital signals at the
moment.

This is normal behavior, wait until
the digital signal returns. If out of
the coverage area, seek a new station.

Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/HD3 multicast channel preset.

The digital multicast content is not available until HD
Radio™ broadcast can be
decoded and make the audio available. This takes up
to 7 seconds.

This is normal behavior, wait for the
audio to become available.

Text information does not
match the present song audio.

Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences.

No text information shown
for the present selected frequency.

Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.

Broadcaster should be notified.
Complete the form;
www.ibiquity.com/automotive/
report_radio_station_experiences.

160

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. RADIO OPERATION

2. XM Satellite Radio
OVERVIEW
The radio operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143
■ CONTROL SCREEN

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

■ CONTROL PANEL

161

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. RADIO OPERATION

No.

Function
Select to display the radio preset buttons. (P. 154)
Select to display a receivable channel list. (P. 165)
Select to scan for receivable channels of the selected program type/channel category.
Select to display the “Type List” screen. (P. 157)
Select to display text messages.
 Turn to step up/down channels.
 Turn to move up/down the list.
 Press to select a preset channel.
 Press and hold to seek for a channel.

162

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. RADIO OPERATION

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN
XM Satellite Radio

HOW TO SUBSCRIBE
It is necessary to enter into a separate
service agreement with XM Satellite
Radio in order to receive satellite broadcast programming in the vehicle. Additional
activation
and
service
subscription fees apply that are not included in the purchase price of the vehicle and digital satellite tuner.
 For complete information on subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe to
XM Satellite Radio:
 U.S.A.
Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call

1-877-447-0011.
Canada
Refer to www.siriusxm.ca or call
1-877-438-9677.

●XM Radio Services Legal Disclaimers
and Warnings
• Fees and Taxes  Subscription fee,
taxes, one time activation fee, and other
fees may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming
subject to change.
Subscriptions subject to Customer
Agreement available at
www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada) XM service only available in the 48 contiguous
United States and Canada.
Explicit Language Notice Channels
with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL” preceding the channel name. Channel blocking is available
for XM Satellite Radio receivers by
notifying XM at;
U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or calling
1-877-447-0011
Canadian Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.ca or calling
1-877-438-9677
●It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, hack, manipulate, or otherwise make available any
technology or software incorporated in
receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio System or that support the XM
website, the Online Service or any of its
content. Furthermore, the AMBE® voice
compression software included in this
product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice
Systems, Inc.
●Note: this applies to XM receivers only
and not XM Ready devices.

163

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in
the vehicle, a subscription to the XM
Satellite Radio service is necessary.
An XM Satellite Radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts
provided under a separate subscription.
Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous U.S. states and some Canadian
provinces.

NOTICE

2. RADIO OPERATION

INFORMATION

●XM Radio Services Descriptions
• Radio and Entertainment
XM offers more than 170 satellite radio
channels of commercial-free music and
premier sports, news, talk, and entertainment. XM is broadcast via satellites
to millions of listeners across the continental United States. XM subscribers
listen to XM on satellite radio receivers
for the car, home, and portable use.
More information about XM is available
online at www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
●XM Radio Services  Subscription
Instructions
• For XM Services requiring a subscription (such as XM Radio), the following
paragraph shall be included.
Required XM Radio monthly subscriptions sold separately after trial period.
Subscription fee is consumer only. All
fees and programming subject to
change. Subscriptions are subject to the
Customer Agreement available at
(U.S.A.)
or
www.siriusxm.com
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada) XM service only available in the 48 contiguous
United States and 10 Canadian provinces.  2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc.
All other marks, channel names and
logos are the property of their respective owners.
For more information, program schedules, and to subscribe or extend subscription after complimentary trial
period; more information is available at:
U.S.A. Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.com or call
1-877-447-0011
Canadian Customers:
Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call
1-877-438-9677

164

LS460_600h_Navi_U

INFORMATION

●XM Satellite Radio is solely responsible
for the quality, availability and content of
the satellite radio services provided,
which are subject to the terms and conditions of the XM Satellite Radio customer
service agreement.
●Customers should have their radio ID
ready; the radio ID can be found by tuning to “Ch 000” on the radio. For details,
see “DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID”
below.
●All fees and programming are the
responsibility of XM Satellite Radio and
are subject to change.

SATELLITE TUNER
TECHNOLOGY NOTICE
Lexus’s satellite radio tuners are awarded Type Approval Certificates from XM
Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility with the services offered by XM
Satellite Radio.
INFORMATION

●Satellite tuner
The tuner supports only Audio Services
(Music and Talk) and the accompanying
Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio.

2. RADIO OPERATION

DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID
Each XM tuner is identified with a
unique radio ID. The radio ID is required
when activating an XM service or when
reporting a problem.

1 Select “Channel List”.
2 Select the desired channel category.
3 Select the desired channel.
“Info”: Select to display the control screen.
4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

 If “Ch 000” is selected using the
“TUNE·SCROLL” knob, the ID code,
which is 8 alphanumeric characters, will be
displayed. If another channel is selected,
the ID code will no longer be displayed.
The channel (000) alternates between displaying the radio ID and the specific radio
code.

SELECTING A CHANNEL
FROM THE LIST

165

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. RADIO OPERATION

IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS
When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.
Message

“Ck Antenna”

“Ch Unauth”

Explanation
The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna
cable is attached securely.
A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified dealer for assistance.
You have not subscribed to XM Satellite Radio. The radio is being
updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM Satellite Radio
for subscription information. When a contract is canceled, you can
choose “Ch 000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about
2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”.
If it does not change automatically, select another channel. To listen
to the premium channel, contact XM Satellite Radio.

“No Signal”

The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

“Loading...”

The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit
has received the information.

“Ch Off Air”

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

-----

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with
the channel at that time. No action is required.

“Ch Unavail”

The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”. If it
does not change automatically, select another channel.

INFORMATION

●Contact the XM Listener Care Center at 1-877-447-0011 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677
(Canada).

166

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. RADIO OPERATION

3. INTERNET RADIO
LISTENING TO INTERNET
RADIO*
One of LEXUS App Suite’s features is
the ability to listen to internet radio. In order to use this service, a compatible
phone and the system needs to be set
up. For details: P. 394

1 Display the audio source selection
screen. (P. 143)
button.

 The internet radio application screen is displayed.
 Perform operations according to the displayed application screen.
 For the instrument panel operation method
and the Remote Touch operation method:
P. 143
 By pressing the “RADIO” button, the
“Audio” screen can be returned to.

●Other applications can be activated
while listening to internet radio.
●An iPhone cannot be connected via
Bluetooth® and USB connection at the
same time. However, it is possible to
recharge an iPhone while using applications by connecting via USB. The system
uses the connection method that was
used last. Therefore, if connected via
USB after Bluetooth® connection, it is
necessary to reconnect the iPhone via
Bluetooth®.
●Some parts of applications can be
adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel.
●For additional information, refer to
http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call
1-800-255-3987.

*: With navigation function
167

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

2 Select the desired application screen

INFORMATION

3. MEDIA OPERATION

1. CD
OVERVIEW
The CD operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143
Inserting a disc (P. 144)
■ CONTROL SCREEN
Audio CD

MP3/WMA/AAC disc

■ CONTROL PANEL

168

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

No.

Function
 Displays cover art
 Select to display a track/file list.
 Audio CD: Select to display a track list.
 MP3/WMA/AAC disc: Select to display a folder list. To return to the top screen, select
“Now Playing” on the list screen.
Select to set random playback. (P. 170)
4

Select to set repeat playback. (P. 170)

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

 Select to select a track/file.
 Select and hold to fast forward.
Select to play/pause.
 Select to select a track/file.
 Select and hold to rewind.
Select to select a folder.
 Turn to select a track/file.
 Turn to move up/down the list.
Press to play/pause.
 Press to select a track/file.
 Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
INFORMATION

●If a disc contains CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA files can be
played back.
●If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. Up to 32 characters can be displayed.

169

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

REPEATING

RANDOM ORDER

The track/file or folder currently being
listened to can be repeated.

Tracks/files or folders can be automatically and randomly selected.

1 Select

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:

Audio CD

• track repeat  off

MP3/WMA/AAC disc
• file repeat  folder repeat  off*1
• file repeat  off*2
1
* : When random playback is off
*2: When random playback is on

170

LS460_600h_Navi_U

• random (1 disc random)  off

MP3/WMA/AAC disc
• random (1 folder random) 
folder random (1 disc random)  off

3. MEDIA OPERATION

2. DVD
For safety reasons, the DVD video discs can only be viewed when the following conditions are met:
(a) The vehicle is completely stopped.
(b) The engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
(c) The parking brake is applied.
While driving in DVD video mode, only the DVD’s audio can be heard.
The playback condition of some DVD discs may be determined by the DVD software
producer. This DVD player plays a disc as the software producer intended. As such,
some functions may not work properly. Be sure to read the instruction manual that
comes with the individual DVD disc. (P. 205)

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

OVERVIEW
The DVD operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143
Inserting a disc (P. 144)
■ CONTROL SCREEN

171

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

■ CONTROL PANEL

No.

Function
Select to display the menu control key.
Select to display full screen video.
 Select to select a chapter.
 During playback: Select and hold to fast forward.
 During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward.
Select to play/pause.
Select to stop the video screen.
 Select to select a chapter.
 Select and hold to rewind.
Select to display the option screen. (P. 174)
Select to display the menu screen.
Select to display the password input screen.
Turn to select a chapter.
Press to play/pause.
 Press to select a chapter.
 Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

172

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CAUTION
●Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the
impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent
the maximum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound
effects or when you change to a different audio source. The louder sounds may have a significant impact on the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind when you
adjust the volume.
INFORMATION

173

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

●According to the DVD disc, some menu items can be selected directly. (For details, see the
manual that comes with the DVD disc provided separately.)
●If appears on the screen when a control is selected, the operation relevant to the control
is not permitted.

3. MEDIA OPERATION

SEARCHING BY TITLE

DVD OPTIONS

1 Select “Search”.
2 Enter the title number and select “OK”.

1 Select “Options”.
2 The following screen is displayed.

 The player starts playing video for that title
number.

CHANGING THE AUDIO
LANGUAGE

1 Select “Audio”.
2 Each time “Change” is selected, the auNo.

Function

Page

Select to display the title
search screen.

174

Select to display the predetermined scene on the
screen and start playing.



Select to display the audio
selection screen.

174

Select to display the subtitle
selection screen.

175

Select to display the angle
selection screen.

175

Select to change the screen
size.

148

Select to display the image
quality adjustment screen.

149

174

LS460_600h_Navi_U

dio language is changed.

 The languages available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE
LANGUAGE

1 Select “Subtitle”.
2 Each time “Change” is selected, the language the subtitles are displayed in is
changed.

 The languages available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.
 When “Hide” is selected, the subtitles can
be hidden.

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

CHANGING THE ANGLE
The angle can be selected for discs that
are multi-angle compatible when the angle mark appears on the screen.

1 Select “Angle”.
2 Each time “Change” is selected, the angle is changed.

 The angles available are restricted to those
available on the DVD disc.

175

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

3. USB MEMORY
OVERVIEW
The USB memory operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
P. 143
Connecting a USB memory (P. 145)
■ CONTROL SCREEN

■ CONTROL PANEL

176

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

No.

Function
 Displays cover art
 Select to display a file/track list.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
Select to display the play mode selection screen.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
Select to set random playback. (P. 179)
4

Select to set repeat playback. (P. 179)

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

 Select to select a file/track.
 Select and hold to fast forward.
Select to play/pause.
 Select to select a file/track.
 Select and hold to rewind.
Select to select a folder/album.
 Turn to select a file/track.
 Turn to move up/down the list.
Press to play/pause.
 Press to select a file/track.
 Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

177

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CAUTION
●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the USB memory while driving.

NOTICE
●Depending on the size and shape of the USB memory that is connected to the system, the
console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box as this
may damage the USB memory or the terminal, etc.
●Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.
INFORMATION

●If tag information exists, the file/folder names will be changed to track/album names.

178

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

REPEATING

RANDOM ORDER

The file/track or folder/album currently
being listened to can be repeated.

Files/tracks or folders/albums can be
automatically and randomly selected.

1 Select

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:

When random playback is off

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• random (1 folder/album random) 
folder/album random (all folder/album 4
random)  off
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

• file/track repeat  folder/album
repeat  off

When random playback is on
• file/track repeat  off

179

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

4. iPod
OVERVIEW
The iPod operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143
Connecting an iPod (P. 145)
■ CONTROL SCREEN
iPod audio

iPod video

■ CONTROL PANEL

180

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

Function

No.

Video

 Displays cover art
 Select to display a track list.
To return to the top screen, select “Now
Playing” on the list screen.



Select to display the play mode selection
screen.
To return to the top screen, select “Now
Playing” on the list screen.

Select to set random playback. (P. 183)



Select to set repeat playback. (P. 183)



 Select to select a track.
 Select and hold to fast forward.

 Select to select a file.
 Select and hold to fast forward.

Select to play/pause.

 Select to select a track.
 Select and hold to rewind.

 Select to select a file.
 Select and hold to rewind.



Select to display full screen video.



Select to display the option screen.
(P. 183)

 Turn to select a track.
 Turn to move up/down the list.

 Turn to select a file.
 Turn to move up/down the list.

Press to play/pause.

 Press to select a track.
 Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

 Press to select a file.
 Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

181

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Audio

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CAUTION
●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the iPod while driving.

NOTICE
●Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the system, the console
box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box as this may damage the iPod or the terminal, etc.
●Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high temperatures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable player while it is connected as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player or its terminal.
INFORMATION

●The system can only output the sound while driving.
●When an iPod is connected using a genuine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its battery.
●Depending on the iPod, the video sound may not be able to be heard.
●Depending on the iPod and the songs in the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed. This
function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (P. 200) It may take time to display iPod cover
art, and the iPod may not be operated while the cover art display is in process.
●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod will
resume playing from the same point it was last used.
●Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available.
●For viewing videos from an iPod, it is necessary to set “Video Sound Input” to “A/V”.
(P. 200)
●If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth® and USB at the same time, system operation may
become unstable. For known phone compatibility information, refer to
http://www.lexus.com/enform/.
●The system may not function properly if a conversion adapter is used to connect a device.

182

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

iPod AUDIO

iPod VIDEO

REPEATING
The track currently being listened to can
be repeated.

1 Select

To change to iPod video mode, select
“Browse” on the iPod audio screen, then
select the “Videos” tab and select the
desired video file.
iPod VIDEO OPTIONS

1 Select “Options”.
2 Select the desired settings to change.

RANDOM ORDER
Tracks or albums can be automatically
and randomly selected.

1 Select

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• track shuffle  album shuffle  off

No.

Function

Page

Select to change the screen
size.

148

Select to display the image
quality adjustment screen.

149

Select to change audio settings.

199

183

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• track repeat  off

3. MEDIA OPERATION

5. Bluetooth® AUDIO
The Bluetooth® audio system enables users to enjoy listening to music that is played
on a portable player on the vehicle speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth®, a wireless data system capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your device does not support Bluetooth®, the
Bluetooth® audio system will not function.

OVERVIEW
The Bluetooth® audio operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
P. 143
Depending on the type of portable player connected, some functions may not be available and/or the screen may look differently than shown in this manual.
Connecting a Bluetooth® audio device (P. 188)
■ CONTROL SCREEN

184

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

■ CONTROL PANEL

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
185

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

No.

Function
 Displays cover art
 Select to display a track list.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
Select to display the portable device connection screen. (P. 188)
Select to display the playlist screen.
To return to the top screen, select “Now Playing” on the list screen.
Select to set random playback. (P. 188)
Select to set repeat playback. (P. 188)
 Select to select a track.
 Select and hold to fast forward.
Select to play/pause.
 Select to select a track.
 Select and hold to rewind.
Select to select an album.
Displays Bluetooth® device condition
 Turn to select a track.
 Turn to move up/down the list.
Press to play/pause.
 Press to select a track.
 Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

186

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CAUTION

NOTICE
●Do not leave your portable player in the vehicle. In particular, high temperatures inside the
vehicle may damage the portable player.
INFORMATION

●Depending on the Bluetooth® device that is connected to the system, the music may start
playing when selecting

while it is paused. Conversely, the music may pause when

selecting
while it is playing.
●In the following conditions, the system may not function:
• The Bluetooth® device is turned off.
• The Bluetooth® device is not connected.
• The Bluetooth® device has a low battery.
●It may take time to connect the phone when Bluetooth® audio is being played.
●For operating the portable player, see the instruction manual that comes with it.
●If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected due to poor reception from the Bluetooth® network when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode,
the system automatically reconnects the portable player.
●If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected on purpose, such as it was turned off, this does not
happen. Reconnect the portable player manually.
●Bluetooth® device information is registered when the Bluetooth® device is connected to
the Bluetooth® audio system. When selling or disposing of the vehicle, remove the
Bluetooth® audio information from the system. (P. 61)
●In some situations, sound output via the Bluetooth® audio system may be out of sync with
the connected device or output intermittently.

187

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect to the Bluetooth® audio system while driving.
●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter
defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the
Bluetooth® antennas. The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices.
●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information
about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected
effects on the operation of such medical devices.

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
DEVICE
To use the Bluetooth® audio system, it is
necessary to register a Bluetooth® device with the system.
Registering an additional device

LISTENING TO Bluetooth®
AUDIO
REPEATING
The track or album currently being listened to can be repeated.

1 Select “Connect” on the Bluetooth®

1 Select

2 For more information: P. 46

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• track repeat  album repeat  off

audio control screen.

Selecting a registered device

1 Select “Connect” on the Bluetooth®
audio control screen.

2 For more information: P. 48

RANDOM ORDER
Tracks or albums can be automatically
and randomly selected.

1 Select

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• album random  all track random  off

188

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

6. AUX
While driving, video will not be displayed. Only sound will be output.

OVERVIEW
The AUX operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P. 143
Connecting a device to the AUX port (P. 145)
■ CONTROL SCREEN

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

When “External” is selected

189

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. MEDIA OPERATION

■ CONTROL PANEL

Function

No.

AUX

External

Select to display the external operation
screen.



Select to display full screen video.



Select to display the option screen.
(P. 192)



Select to display the aux operation screen.

Press to turn mute on/off.

190

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Press to turn mute on/off.

3. MEDIA OPERATION

CAUTION
●Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls while driving.

NOTICE

INFORMATION

●When connecting an external device that does not output an image, select “AUX”. If
“External” is selected, an all-black (blank) screen will be displayed.
●If the source is changed between AUX and External while the system is operating, sound
may not be output momentarily.

191

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

●Depending on the size and shape of the portable audio device that is connected to the system, the console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box as
this may damage the portable audio device or the terminal, etc.
●Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the player.
●Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the portable audio device while it is
connected as this may damage the portable audio device or its terminal.
●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable audio device or
its terminal.

3. MEDIA OPERATION

EXTERNAL OPTIONS

1 Select “Options”.
2 Select the desired settings to change.

No.

Function

Page

Select to change the screen
size.

148

Select to display the image
quality adjustment screen.

149

192

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

1. STEERING SWITCHES
Some parts of the audio/visual system can be adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel.

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

No.

Switch
Volume control switch
“ ” switch
“MODE” switch

Volume control switch
Mode
All

Operation

Function

Press

Volume up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Volume up/down continuously

193

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

“ ” switch
Mode
AM, FM

SAT

MP3/
WMA/AAC
disc

DVD

USB

iPod

Bluetooth®
audio

194

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Operation

Function

Press

Preset station up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Seek up/down continuously while the switch is being
pressed

Press

Preset channel up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Type seek up/down

Press and hold
(1.5 sec. or more)

Fast up/down

Press

Track up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Fast forward/rewind

Press

File up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Fast forward/rewind

Press

Chapter up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Fast forward/rewind

Press

File/Track up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Fast forward/rewind

Press

Track/File up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Fast forward/rewind

Press

Track up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Fast forward/rewind

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

“MODE” switch
Mode
AM, FM,
SAT, AUX

Function

Press

Change audio modes

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Mute

Press

Change audio modes

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Pause

*: With navigation function
INFORMATION

●In the APPS mode, some operation may be done on the screen depend on the selected
APPS.

195

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

CD, MP3/
WMA/AAC
disc, DVD,
USB, iPod,
Bluetooth®
audio,
APPS*

Operation

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

2. REAR SEAT AUDIO CONTROLS*
Some parts of the audio/visual system can be adjusted using the switches on the rear
seat audio controls.

No.

Switch
“TUNE/TRACK” switch
“CH/FLD” switch
Display
“PWR” switch
“MODE” switch
“VOL” switch

*: If equipped
196

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

“TUNE/TRACK” switch
Mode
AM, FM

SAT

MP3/
WMA/AAC
disc

DVD

USB

iPod

Bluetooth®
audio

Function

Press

Tune the frequency up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Seek up/down continuously while the switch is being
pressed

Press

Select a channel

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Fast up/down

Press

Track up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Fast forward/rewind

Press

File up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Fast forward/rewind

Press

Chapter up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Fast forward/rewind

Press

File/Track up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Fast forward/rewind

Press

Track/File up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Fast forward/rewind

Press

Track up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Fast forward/rewind

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Operation

197

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4. AUDIO/VISUAL REMOTE CONTROLS

“CH/FLD” switch
Mode

Operation

Function

AM, FM,
SAT

Press

Preset station/channel up/down

MP3/
WMA/AAC
disc

Press

Folder up/down

USB

Press

Folder/Album up/down

Bluetooth®
audio

Press

Album up/down

“PWR” switch
Mode
All

Operation

Function

Press

Audio system on/off

Press and hold
(3 sec. or more)

Control panel illumination on the rear armrest on/off

“MODE” switch
Mode
All

Operation

Function

Press

Change audio modes

Press and hold
(3 sec. or more)

Lock/Unlock the buttons on the rear armrest

“VOL” switch
Mode
All

Operation

Function

Press

Volume up/down

Press and hold
(0.8 sec. or more)

Volume up/down continuously

INFORMATION

●In the APPS mode, some operation may be done on the screen depend on the selected
APPS.

198

LS460_600h_Navi_U

5. SETUP

1. AUDIO SETTINGS
Detailed audio settings can be programmed.

AUDIO SETTINGS SCREEN

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

No.

Page

Select to set the iPod audio
signal input settings.

200

Select to set the video signal format settings.

200

Select to change the number of preset radio stations
displayed on the screen.

200

Select to set detailed cover
art settings.

200

Select to set detailed DVD
settings.

201

*: Only in DVD video mode

199

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “Audio”.
4 Select the desired item to be set.

Function

5. SETUP

iPod SETTINGS

COVER ART SETTINGS

1 Display the audio setting screen.

2 Select “iPod Settings”.
3 Select “Video Sound Input”.
4 Select a screen button for the desired

2 Select “Cover Art Settings”.
3 Select the desired button to be set.

(P. 199)

setting.

EXTERNAL VIDEO SETTINGS

1 Display the audio setting screen.
(P. 199)

2 Select “External Video Settings”.
3 Select “Video Signal Switch”.
4 Select a screen button for the desired
setting.

SETTING THE NUMBER OF
RADIO PRESETS

1 Display the audio setting screen.
(P. 199)

2 Select “Number of Radio Presets”.
3 Select the button with the desired num-

No.

Function
Select on/off to set the cover art display in DISC mode.
Select on/off to set the cover art display in USB mode.
Select on/off to set the priority of the
Gracenote database in USB mode.
Select on/off to set the cover art display in iPod mode.
Select on/off to set the priority of the
Gracenote database in iPod mode.

ber to be displayed.

 “Default”: Select to default the settings.

INFORMATION

●Images from the Gracenote database
displayed on the screen may be different
from the actual cover art.

200

LS460_600h_Navi_U

5. SETUP

DVD SETTINGS

Page

1 Display the audio setting screen.

Select to change the audio
language.

202

2 Select “DVD Settings”.
3 Select the items to be set.

Select to change the subtitle language.

202

Select to change the language of the DVD video
menu.

202

Select to set the angle mark
on/off.



Select to set the parental
lock.

202

Select to set the auto start
playback on/off.
Discs that are inserted
while the vehicle is in motion will automatically start
playing. Certain discs may
not play.



Select to set a dynamic
range.

202

Select to initialize all menus.



201

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Function

(P. 199)

No.

5. SETUP

■ AUDIO LANGUAGE

■ PARENTAL LOCK

1 Select “Audio Language”.
2 Select the desired language to be

1 Select “Parental Lock”.
2 Enter the 4-digit personal code.
3 Select a parental level (1-8).

heard.

 If the desired language to be heard cannot
be found on this screen, select “Other” and
enter a language code. (P. 203)

■ SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

1 Select “Subtitle Language”.
2 Select the desired language to be read.
 If the desired language to be read cannot
be found on this screen, select “Other” and
enter a language code. (P. 203)

■ MENU LANGUAGE

1 Select “Menu Language”.
2 Select the desired language to be read.
 If the desired language to be read cannot
be found on this screen, select “Other” and
enter a language code. (P. 203)

202

LS460_600h_Navi_U

■ SOUND DYNAMIC RANGE
The difference between the lowest volume and the highest volume can be adjusted.

1 Select “Dynamic Range”.
2 Select “MAX”, “STD” or “MIN”.

5. SETUP

LANGUAGE CODES LIST
Code

Language

Code

Language

0514

English

0515

Esperanto

Code

Language

1214

Lingala

Code

Language

1913

Samoan

1001

Japanese

0520

Estonian

1215

Laotian

1914

Shona

0618

French

0521

Basque

1220

Lithuanian

1915

Somali

0405

German

0601

Persian

1222

Latvian, Lettish

1917

Albanian

0920

Italian

0609

Finnish

1307

Malagasy

1918

Serbian

0519

Spanish

0610

Fiji

1309

Maori

1919

Siswati

2608

Chinese

0615

Faroese

1311

Macedonian

1920

Sesotho

Dutch

0625

Frisian

1312

Malayalam

1921

Sundanese

Portuguese

0701

Irish

1314

Mongolian

1923

Swahili

1922

Swedish

0704

Scottish-Gaelic

1315

Moldavian

2001

Tamil

1821

Russian

0712

Galician

1318

Marathi

2005

Telugu

1115

Korean

0714

Guarani

1319

Malay

2007

Tajik

0512

Greek

0721

Gujarati

1320

Maltese

2008

Thai

0101

Afar

0801

Hausa

1325

Burmese

2009

Tigrinya

0102

Abkhazian

0809

Hindi

1401

Nauru

2011

Turkmen

0106

Afrikaans

0818

Croatian

1405

Nepali

2012

Tagalog

0113

Amharic

0821

Hungarian

1415

Norwegian

2014

Setswana

0118

Arabic

0825

Armenian

1503

Occitan

2015

Tongan

0119

Assamese

0901

Interlingua

1513

(Afan) Oromo

2018

Turkish

0125

Aymara

0905

Interlingue

1518

Oriya

2019

Tsonga

0126

Azerbaijani

0911

Inupiak

1601

Punjabi

2020

Tatar

2023

Twi

0201

Bashkir

0914

Indonesian

1612

Polish

0205

Byelorussian

0919

Icelandic

1619

Pashto, Pushto

2111

Ukrainian

0207

Bulgarian

0923

Hebrew

1721

Quechua

2118

Urdu

0208

Bihari

1009

Yiddish

1813

Rhaeto-Romance

2126

Uzbek

0209

Bislama

1023

Javanese

1814

Kirundi

2209

Vietnamese

0214

Bengali, Bangla

1101

Georgian

1815

Romanian

2215

Volapük

0215

Tibetan

1111

Kazakh

1823

Kinyarwanda

2315

Wolof

0218

Breton

1112

Greenlandic

1901

Sanskrit

2408

Xhosa

0301

Catalan

1113

Cambodian

1904

Sindhi

2515

Yoruba

0315

Corsican

1114

Kannada

1907

Sango

2621

Zulu

0319

Czech

1119

Kashmiri

1908

Serbo-Croatian

0325

Welsh

1121

Kurdish

1909

Sinhalese

0401

Danish

1125

Kirghiz

1911

Slovak

0426

Bhutani

1201

Latin

1912

Slovenian

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

1412
1620

203

LS460_600h_Navi_U

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

1. OPERATING INFORMATION
NOTICE
●To avoid damage to the audio/visual system:
• Be careful not to spill beverages over
the audio/visual system.
• Do not put anything other than an
appropriate disc into the disc slot.
INFORMATION

●The use of a cellular phone inside or near
the vehicle may cause a noise from the
speakers of the audio/visual system which
you are listening to. However, this does
not indicate a malfunction.

RADIO
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
the radio — it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with FM reception.
Power lines or phone wires can interfere
with AM signals. And of course, radio
signals have a limited range. The farther
the vehicle is from a station, the weaker
its signal will be. In addition, reception
conditions change constantly as the vehicle moves.
Here, some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a
problem with the radio are described.

204

LS460_600h_Navi_U

FM
Fading and drifting stations: Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 25 miles (40
km). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with
the distance from the radio transmitter.
They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, making it possible for 2 signals to reach the vehicle’s antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other
out, causing a momentary flutter or loss of
reception.
Static and fluttering: These occur when signals are blocked by buildings, trees or other
large objects. Increasing the bass level may
reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping: If the FM signal being listened to is interrupted or weakened, and
there is another strong station nearby on
the FM band, the radio may tune in the second station until the original signal can be
picked up again.

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

XM
 Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,
especially metal objects, may adversely
affect the reception of XM Satellite Radio.
 Alternation or modifications carried out
without appropriate authorization may
invalidate the user’s right to operate the
equipment.

 This DVD player is intended for use with
4.7 in. (12 cm). discs only.
 Extremely high temperatures can keep the
DVD player from working. On hot days,
use the air conditioning system to cool the
inside of the vehicle before using the player.
 Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make
the DVD player skip.
 If moisture gets into the DVD player, the 4
discs may not be able to be played. Remove
the discs from the player and wait until it
dries.

CAUTION
●The DVD player uses an invisible laser
beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed outside the
unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly.

205

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected by the
upper atmosphere — especially at night.
These reflected signals can interfere with
those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.
Station interference: When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static: AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening or electrical
motors. This results in static.

DVD PLAYER AND DISC

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

DVD PLAYER

Special shaped discs

Audio CDs

DVD video
discs

Transparent/translucent discs

DVD-R/RW
discs

 Use only discs marked as shown above.
The following products may not be playable
on your player:
• SACD
• dts CD
• Copy-protected CD
• DVD-Audio
• Video CD
• DVD-RAM

206

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Low quality discs

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Labeled discs

Correct

●Do not use special shaped, transparent/
translucent, low quality or labeled discs
such as those shown in the illustrations.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject the
disc.
●This system is not designed for use of
Dual Discs. Do not use Dual Discs
because they may cause damage to the
player.
●Do not use discs with a protection ring.
The use of such discs may damage the
player, or it may be impossible to eject the
disc.
●Do not use printable discs. The use of
such discs may damage the player, or it
may be impossible to eject the disc.

 Handle discs carefully, especially when 4
inserting them. Hold them on the edge and
do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny
side.
 Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other
disc damage could cause the player to skip
or to repeat a section of a track. (To see a
pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)
 Remove discs from the players when not in
use. Store them in their plastic cases away
from moisture, heat and direct sunlight.

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

NOTICE

Wrong

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-free
cloth that has been dampened with water.
Wipe in a straight line from the center to the
edge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it with
another soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use a
conventional record cleaner or anti-static
device.

207

LS460_600h_Navi_U

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

CD-R/RW AND DVD-R/RW
DISCS
 CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not been
subject to the “finalizing process” (a process that allows discs to be played on a
conventional CD player) cannot be played.
 It may not be possible to play CD-R/CD-RW
discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a
personal computer because of disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,
condensation, etc. on the lens of the unit.
 It may not be possible to play discs
recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and the environment. Record with the correct format.
(For details, contact the appropriate application manufacturers of the applications.)
 CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged by
direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit
may be unable to play some damaged
discs.
 If you insert a CD-RW disc into the player,
playback will begin more slowly than with a
conventional CD or CD-R disc.
 Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot be
played using the DDCD (Double Density
CD) system.

208

LS460_600h_Navi_U

DVD VIDEO DISCS
This DVD player conforms to NTSC/
PAL color TV formats. DVD video discs
conforming to another format such as
SECAM cannot be used.
Region codes: Some DVD video discs have
the following region code indicating which
countries the DVD video disc can be played
in on this DVD player. If you attempt to play
an inappropriate DVD video disc on this
player, error message appears on the
screen. Even if the DVD video disc does not
have a region code, there are cases when it
cannot be used.
Code
ALL
1

Country
All countries
North America

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

■ MARKS SHOWN ON DVD VIDEO
DISCS
NTSC/PAL

Indicates NTSC/PAL
format of color TV.
Indicates the number
of audio tracks.
Indicates the number
of language subtitles.

Indicates the screen to
be selected.
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates a region
code by which this video disc can be played.
“ALL”: in all countries
Number: region code

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc that
holds video. DVD video discs have adopted
“MPEG2”, one of the world standards of
digital compression technologies. The picture data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable rate encoded
technology in which the volume of data assigned to the picture is changed depending
on the picture format has also been adopt- 4
ed. Audio data is stored using PCM and
Dolby Digital, which enables higher quality
of sound. Furthermore, multi-angle and
multi-language features will also help users
enjoy the more advanced technology of
DVD video.
Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what
can be viewed in conformity with a level of
restrictions of the country. The level of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be
played at all, or violent scenes are skipped
or replaced with other scenes.

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Indicates the number
of angles.

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

• Level 1: DVD video discs for children can
be played.
• Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for children
and G-rated movie can be played.
• Level 8: All types of the DVD video discs
can be played.

209

LS460_600h_Navi_U

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Multi-angle feature: The same scene can
be enjoyed from different angles.
Multi-language feature: The subtitle and
audio language can be selected.
Region codes: The region codes are provided on DVD players and DVD discs. If the
DVD video disc does not have the same region code as the DVD player, you cannot
play the disc on the DVD player. For region
codes: (P. 208)
Audio: This DVD player can play linear
PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio format DVDs. Other decoded types cannot be
played.
Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored in DVD video discs are divided into parts by title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and audio
programs stored on DVD video discs. Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio
program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A unit smaller than that of title. A
title comprises of several chapters.
 Manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.

iPod

 “Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”, and
“Made for iPad” mean that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect
specifically to iPod, iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
 Apple is not responsible for the operation
of this device or its compliance with safety
and regulatory standards. Please note that
the use of this accessory with iPod, iPhone,
or iPad may affect wireless performance.
 iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano,
and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
 The Lightning connector works with
iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPod touch
(5th generation), and iPod nano (7th generation).
 The 30-pin connector works with iPhone
4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G,
iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 4th generation), iPod classic, and iPod nano (1st
through 6th generation).
 USB works with iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c,
iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone
3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod touch (1st
through 5th generation), iPod classic, and
iPod nano (1st through 7th generation).
 Bluetooth® technology works with iPhone
5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone
4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone, and
iPod touch (2nd through 5th generation).

210

LS460_600h_Navi_U

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

COMPATIBLE MODELS
The following iPod®, iPod nano®, iPod
classic®, iPod touch® and iPhone® devices can be used with this system.
Made for

■ COMPATIBLE USB DEVICES
USB communication
formats

USB 2.0 HS
(480 Mbps) and
FS (12 Mbps)

File formats

FAT 16/32

Correspondence class

Mass
class

■ COMPATIBLE
FILES
Item
Compatible
file format
(audio)

storage

COMPRESSED

USB/iPod

DISC

MP3/WMA/AAC

Folders in the
device

Maximum
3000

Maximum
192

Files in the
device

Maximum
9999

Maximum
255

Files per
folder

Maximum
255



INFORMATION

●Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some models might be incompatible with this
system.

211

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

• iPod touch (5th generation)*
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (7th generation)*
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 5s*
• iPhone 5c*
• iPhone 5*
• iPhone 4S
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
*: iPod video not supported

FILE INFORMATION

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

■ CORRESPONDING
FREQUENCY
File type

SAMPLING

■ COMPATIBLE CHANNEL MODES
File type

Frequency
(kHz)

Channel mode

MP3 files

Stereo, joint stereo, dual
channel and monaural

MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3

32/44.1/48

WMA files

2ch

MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3

16/22.05/24

AAC files

1ch, 2ch (Dual channel is not
supported)

WMA files:
Ver. 7, 8, 9* (9.1/9.2)

32/44.1/48

AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC

11.025/12/16/
22.05/24/32/
44.1/48

*: Only compatible with Windows Media
Audio Standard

■ CORRESPONDING BIT RATES*1
File type

Bit rate (kbps)

MP3 files:
MPEG 1 LAYER 3

32 - 320

MP3 files:
MPEG 2 LSF LAYER 3

8 - 160

WMA files: Ver. 7, 8

CBR 48 - 192

WMA files:
Ver. 9*2 (9.1/9.2)

CBR 48 - 320

AAC files:
MPEG4/AAC-LC

8 - 320

*1: Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible
*2: Only compatible with Windows Media
Audio Standard

212

LS460_600h_Navi_U

 MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA
(Windows Media Audio) and AAC
(Advanced Audio Coding) are audio compression standards.
 This system can play MP3/WMA/AAC
files on CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW
discs and USB memory.
 This system can play disc recordings compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2
and with the Romeo and Joliet file system
and UDF (2.01 or lower).
 When naming an MP3/WMA/AAC file,
add an appropriate file extension (.mp3/
.wma/.m4a).
 This system plays back files with .mp3/
.wma/.m4a file extensions as MP3/WMA/
AAC files respectively. To prevent noise
and playback errors, use the appropriate
file extension.
 This system can play only the first session/
border when using multi session/border
compatible discs.
 MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag
Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Ver. 2.3 formats. This system cannot display disc title,
track title and artist name in other formats.
 WMA/AAC files can contain a WMA/
AAC tag that is used in the same way as an
ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry information such as track title and artist name.
 The emphasis function is available only
when playing MP3 files.
 This system can play back AAC files
encoded by iTunes.

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

001.mp3
002.wma
Folder 1
003.mp3
Folder 2
004.mp3
005.wma
Folder 3
006.m4a

 The play order of the compact disc with the 4
structure shown above is as follows:
001.mp3

002.wma . . .

006.m4a

 The order changes depending on the personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC
encoding software you use.

TERMS
PACKET WRITE
 This is a general term that describes the process of writing data on-demand to CD-R,
etc., in the same way that data is written to
floppy or hard discs.

ID3 TAG
 This is a method of embedding trackrelated information in an MP3 file. This
embedded information can include the
track number, track title, the artist’s name,
the album title, the music genre, the year of
production, comments, cover art and other
data. The contents can be freely edited
using software with ID3 tag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted to a
number of characters, the information can
be viewed when the track is played back.

213

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

 The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally improves with higher bit rates. In
order to achieve a reasonable level of
sound quality, discs recorded with a bit rate
of at least 128 kbps are recommended.
 m3u playlists are not compatible with the
audio player.
 MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO
formats are not compatible with the audio
player.
 The player is compatible with VBR (Variable Bit Rate).
 When playing back files recorded as VBR
(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will
not be correctly displayed if the fast forward or reverse operations are used.
 It is not possible to check folders that do not
include MP3/WMA/AAC files.
 MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up to 8
levels deep can be played. However, the
start of playback may be delayed when
using discs containing numerous levels of
folders. For this reason, we recommend
creating discs with no more than 2 levels of
folders.

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

WMA TAG
 WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA
tags carry information such as track title
and artist name.

ISO 9660 FORMAT
 This is the international standard for the formatting of CD-ROM folders and files. For
the ISO 9660 format, there are 2 levels of
regulations.
 Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8
character file names, with a 3 character file
extension. File names must be composed of
one-byte capital letters and numbers. The
“_” symbol may also be included.)
 Level 2: The file name can have up to 31
characters (including the separation mark
“.” and file extension). Each folder must
contain fewer than 8 hierarchies.

m3u
 Playlists created using “WINAMP” software have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3
 MP3 is an audio compression standard
determined by a working group (MPEG) of
the ISO (International Standard Organization). MP3 compresses audio data to about
1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.

214

LS460_600h_Navi_U

WMA
 WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio
compression format developed by
Microsoft®. It compresses files into a size
smaller than that of MP3 files. The decoding formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and
9.

AAC
 AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding
and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG2 and
MPEG4.

6. TIPS FOR OPERATING THE AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

ERROR MESSAGES
Mode

Message
“No disc found.”

It indicates that there is no disc in the DVD player.

“Check disc”

It indicates that the disc is dirty, damaged, or it
was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or insert it correctly.
It indicates a disc which is not playable is inserted.

CD/DVD

There is a trouble inside the system.
Eject the disc.

“Region Code Error”

It indicates that the DVD region code is not set
properly.

“USB Error”

This indicates a problem in the USB memory or
its connection.

“No music files found.”

This indicates that no MP3/WMA/AAC files
are included in the USB memory.

“iPod Error.”

This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.

“No music files found.”

This indicates that there is no music data in the
iPod.

“No video files found.”

This indicates that no video files are included in
the iPod.

“Please check the iPod
firmware version.”

This indicates that the software version is not
compatible. Perform the iPod firmware updates
and try again.

“iPod authorization failed.”

This indicates that it failed to authorize the iPod.
Please check your iPod.

Bluetooth®
Audio

“Music tracks not supported. Please check your portable player.”

This indicates a problem in the Bluetooth® device.

INFORMATION

●If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.

215

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

“DISC Error”

USB

iPod

Explanation

7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES

1. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES*
QUICK REFERENCE
The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy video
such as Blu-ray Disc (BD) and DVD disc separately from the front audio/visual system.
The system can be used when the engine switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.
FUNCTION INDEX
Operation

Page

Using the remote controller

219

Turning on/off the rear entertainment system

220

Turning on/off the display (with rear console display)

221

Opening/Closing the display (with overhead display)

221

Inserting media or connecting a device to the rear player

222

Selecting the sound mode

224

Selecting the source

225

Operating rear seat entertainment system from the front seats

227

Rear seat entertainment system operation

228

Rear seat entertainment system settings

272

Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system

275

*: If equipped
216

LS460_600h_Navi_U

7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES

OVERVIEW
5-seat models

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

No.

Name
Front audio/visual system
Display
Rear player
Headphone volume control dials and headphone jacks
Remote controller
A/V input port (VTR and HDMI port)

217

LS460_600h_Navi_U

7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES

4-seat models

No.

Name
Front audio/visual system
Display
Rear player
Headphone volume control dials and headphone jacks
A/V input port (VTR and HDMI port)
Remote controller

218

LS460_600h_Navi_U

7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES

2. SOME BASICS
USING THE REMOTE
CONTROLLER

BASIC OPERATION

The rear seat entertainment system can
be operated with the remote controller.
The system cannot be operated by
touching the switches on the screen directly.
Before using the remote controller (for
new vehicle owners): P.276

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

OPENING THE COVER

1 To use the buttons under the cover, slide
the cover down.

219

LS460_600h_Navi_U

7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES

No.

Function
Press to turn on/off the rear seat entertainment system.
Press to turn on/off the display (with
rear console display). (P.221)
Press to open/close the display (with
overhead display). (P.221)

TURNING ON/OFF THE REAR
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

1 Press the

, “DISC”, “INPUT”,
“SOURCE” or “OPEN/CLOSE” (with
overhead display) button.

Press to change the external source
between the following modes:
 “DISC” (Font player)
 “Rear-DISC” (Rear player)
Press to input the selected control
icon.
Press to display the setting screen.
(P.272)
Press to adjust the volume.
This function is only available when
sound is being output from the
speakers. (P.224)
Press to display the audio/visual
source selection screen. (P.225)
Press to select a control icon.
Press to change the external source
between the following modes:
 “Rear-External”
 “Rear-HDMI”

 To turn off the system, press the
ton again.

but-

INFORMATION
● Turning on/off operations can be per-

formed from the front seat. (P.227)

220

LS460_600h_Navi_U

7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES

TURNING ON/OFF THE
DISPLAY (WITH REAR
CONSOLE DISPLAY)

1 Press the

OPENING/CLOSING THE
DISPLAY (WITH OVERHEAD
DISPLAY)

1 Press the “OPEN/CLOSE” button.

button.

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

 To turn off the display, press the
ton again.

but-

 To close the display, press the “OPEN/
CLOSE” button again.
INFORMATION

INFORMATION
● When you press the

sound will not be turned off.

● When you press the “OPEN/CLOSE”

button, the

button, the sound will not be turned off.

● The display can be tilted. (P.274)
● Opening and closing operation can be

set to auto. (P.274)

● The display will stop closing and return to

its previous position if something gets in
the way of it closing.

221

LS460_600h_Navi_U

7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES

INSERTING MEDIA OR
CONNECTING A DEVICE TO
THE REAR PLAYER

■ EJECTING A DISC

1 Press the

button and remove the

disc.

DISC SLOT
■ LOADING A DISC

1 Insert the disc into the slot with the label
side up.

NOTICE
● If a disc cannot be ejected, do not forcibly

take out the disc. Keep pressing the
button for approximately 10 seconds and
release it.

 The “DISC” indicator light turns on when
the disc is loaded.
 The player will start to play the disc automatically.

222

LS460_600h_Navi_U

INFORMATION
● If the ejected disc remains in the slot for

15 seconds, the player will automatically
reload the disc.

7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES

SD CARD SLOT
■ INSERTING AN SD CARD

1 Insert the SD card with the label side up,
positioning the cut off corner to the
right.

A/V INPUT PORT

1 Open the cover and connect audio/vi-

sual equipment to the A/V input port.
5-seat models

2 After inserting the SD card, push it
straight in until you hear a click.

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

4-seat models

■ EJECTING AN SD CARD

1 Push on the center of the SD card.
2 When it is ejected slightly, pull it straight
out.

223

LS460_600h_Navi_U

7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES

SELECTING THE SOUND
MODE
HEADPHONE MODE

SPEAKER MODE
Sound from the rear seat entertainment
system can be output through the
speakers.

To listen to the rear seat entertainment
system, use headphones.

1 Display the audio control screen.

5-seat models

2 Select

(P.225)

 The speaker volume is adjusted using the
remote controller. (P.219)

4-seat models

Headphones jack
 Connect a pair of headphones to the jack.

Volume knob
 Push and then turn clockwise/counterclockwise to increase/decrease the volume.

224

LS460_600h_Navi_U

7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES

SELECTING THE SOURCE
The front and rear audio/visual source
can be controlled from the rear seat entertainment system.

1 Press the “SOURCE” button.
4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

2 Select the desired source.
INFORMATION
● The page indicators above the source

icons can be selected to change the
source icon page.
● If the cursor is on the rightmost source
icon, pressing the  will change the
source icon page.

225

LS460_600h_Navi_U

7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES

Available front audio/
visual source

Available rear audio/
visual source

Page

AM/FM/SAT

“AM”, “FM”, “SAT”



228

Internet radio

“Apps”



Audio CD
MP3/WMA/AAC disc

“DISC”

Audio/visual source

Video CD
DVD
Blu-ray Disc



229
“Rear-DISC”

232

“DISC”

235



242

USB audio

“USB”



250

iPod audio/video

“iPod”



253

Bluetooth® audio

“Bluetooth*”



256



“Rear-SD”

259

“AUX”, “External”

“Rear-External”,
“Rear-HDMI”

271

SD audio/video/picture
AUX, External, HDMI

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
INFORMATION
● If the selected source is currently being received or played on the front audio/visual system,

the same content will be output by the rear seat entertainment system.

226

LS460_600h_Navi_U

7. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM FEATURES

OPERATING REAR SEAT
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
FROM THE FRONT SEATS

1 Display the audio control screen.
(P.143)

2 Select “Source”.
3 Select “Rear”.
4 Select the desired button.

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

No.

Function
Select to turn the rear seat entertainment system on/off.
Select to lock the system so passengers in the rear seats cannot operate
the rear seat entertainment system.
Select to play the rear seat entertainment system over the speakers in the
vehicle.

227

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

1. AM/FM/SAT RADIO
OVERVIEW
The radio operation screen can be reached by the following method:
Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “AM”, “FM” or “SAT” (The XM Satellite radio).
■ REMOTE CONTROLLER

No.

Function
AM/FM Radio: Press to adjust the frequency.
SAT Radio: Press to select a channel.
Press and hold until you hear a beep to seek for receivable stations/channels.
Cache radio only: Press to play/pause.
Cache radio only: Press to skip forward/rewind 2 minutes.
Cache radio only: Press and hold to fast forward/rewind continuously.
Press to select a preset station/channel.
Press and hold until you hear a beep to seek for receivable stations/channels.
AM/FM Radio: Press to select a preset station/channel.
SAT Radio: Press to select a program type/channel category.

INFORMATION
● To return to the live radio broadcast, select “Live”.
228

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

2. CD
OVERVIEW
Audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC discs can be played on this system.
The disc operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “DISC” or “Rear-DISC”.
Inserting a disc
The front player: P.144
The rear player: P.222
Selecting a disc to play (disc in the front player or rear player)
Press the “DISC” button.

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

■ CONTROL SCREEN
Audio CD

MP3/WMA/AAC disc

229

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

■ REMOTE CONTROLLER

No.

Function
Select to set repeat playback. (P.231)
Select to set random playback. (P.231)
Press to select a track/file.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to play/pause.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
MP3/WMA/AAC disc:
Press to select a folder.
Press and hold the “ ” button to select the top file stored in the top folder in the disc.

230

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

REPEATING

RANDOM ORDER

The track/file or folder currently being
listened to can be repeated.

Tracks/files or folders can be automatically and randomly selected.

1 Select

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:

Audio CD

MP3/WMA/AAC disc

• track repeat  off

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

• file repeat  folder repeat  off*1
• file repeat  off*2
1
* : When random playback is off
*2: When random playback is on

• random (1 disc random)  off
• random (1 folder random) 
folder random (1 disc random)  off

231

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

3. VIDEO CD
OVERVIEW
The disc operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “Rear-DISC”.
Inserting a disc (P.222)
■ REMOTE CONTROLLER

No.

Function
 Press to select a track.
 Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to play/pause.
 During playback: Press and hold to fast forward.
 During a pause: Press and hold to slow forward.
Press to stop.
Press to display the option screen. (P.233)
Press and hold to fast rewind.

232

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

VIDEO CD OPTIONS

1 Press the “OPTION” button.
2 Check that the following screen is displayed.

No.

Function
Select to turn off the option screen.
Select to display the next or previous
page.
 During playback: Select and hold
to fast forward.
 During a pause: Select and hold to
slow forward.

Select to play/pause.

Select and hold to rewind.
Select to change the audio channel.
(P.234)
Select to change the page.
Select to return to a predetermined
scene.
Select to select the desired content
using numbers. (P.234)

233

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Select to stop.

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

CHANGING THE AUDIO
CHANNEL
The audio channel can be changed for
discs with multiple audio channels.

1 Select “MAIN/SUB”.
2 Each time “MAIN/SUB” is selected, the

mode changes in the following order:
“Main”: Main audio channel
“Sub”: Sub audio channel
“Main/Sub”: Both the main and sub audio
channels

SELECT THE DESIRED
CONTENT USING NUMBERS

1 Select “Select Number”.
2 Enter the title number and select “OK”.
 The player starts playing video for that title
number.

234

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

4. DVD (DVD VIDEO AND AVCHD DISC)
OVERVIEW
The disc operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “DISC” or “Rear-DISC”.
Inserting a disc
The front player: P.144
The rear player: P.222
Selecting a disc to play (disc in the front player or rear player)
Press the “DISC” button.

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
235

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

■ REMOTE CONTROLLER

No.

Function
Press to select a chapter.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to play/pause.
 During playback: Press and hold to fast forward.
 During a pause: Press and hold to slow forward.
Press to stop.
DVD video only: Press to display the menu screen.
Press to display the option screen. (P.237, 241)
Press to display the top menu screen.
Press and hold to fast rewind.

236

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

DVD VIDEO OPTIONS

1 Press the “OPTION” button.
2 Check that the following screen is displayed.

No.

Function

Page

Select to display the initial
setup screen.

238

Select to turn off the option
screen.



Select to display the next or
previous page.



 During playback: Select
and hold to fast forward.
 During a pause: Select
and hold to slow forward.



Select to play/pause.



Select to stop.



Select and hold to rewind.



Select to display the menu
screen.



Select to display the top
menu screen.



Select to change the angle.

240

Select to change the subtitle language.

240

Select to change the audio
language.

240

Select to return to a predetermined scene.



Select to search for a title.

240

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

237

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

INITIAL SETUP

1 Select “Setup”.
2 Select the items to be set.
When “DISC” is selected

When “Rear-DISC” is selected

No.

Function

Page

Select to change the initial
audio language.

239

Select to change the initial
subtitle language.

239

Select to change the initial
language of the disc menu.

239

Select to set the angle mark
on/off.



Select to set the parental
lock.

239

Select to set a dynamic
range.

239

Select to initialize all menus.



Select to display the second
page.



BD history data such as
bookmarks and resume
point can be deleted.



Select to set the restriction
age.

239

Select to set a quick playback. (BD-Video)
After inserting a BD disc
you can skip over to the first
playback point and can immediately playback the
main story.



Select to set the BD-Video
secondary audio.



3 Select “OK”.

238

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

■ AUDIO LANGUAGE

■ DYNAMIC RANGE

1 Select “Audio Language”.
2 Select the desired language to be

The difference between the lowest and
highest sound volumes can be adjusted.

heard.

 If the desired language to be heard cannot
be found on this screen, select “Other” and
enter a language code. (P.290)

■ SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

 If the desired language to be read cannot
be found on this screen, select “Other” and
enter a language code. (P.290)

■ MENU LANGUAGE

1 Select “Menu Language”.
2 Select the desired language to be read.
 If the desired language to be read cannot
be found on this screen, select “Other” and
enter a language code. (P.290)

■ PARENTAL LOCK

1 Select “Parental Lock”.
2 Enter the 4-digit personal code.
3 Select a parental level (1-8).

ed, the setting changes in the following
order:
“MAX”: Maximum dynamic range
4
“STD”: Standard dynamic range
“MIN”: Minimum dynamic range
“AUTO”: Automatic adjust (Dolby TrueHD
only)

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

1 Select “Subtitle Language”.
2 Select the desired language to be read.

1 Select “Dynamic Range”.
2 Each time “Dynamic Range” is select-

INFORMATION
● “AUTO” is available for BD-Video only.
● “MIN” is not available for BD-Video.

■ BD PARENTAL LOCK

1 Select “BD Parental Lock”.
2 Enter the 4-digit personal code.
3 Enter the age on the “Enter restriction
age” screen.

239

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

CHANGING THE ANGLE

CHANGING THE AUDIO
LANGUAGE

The angle can be selected for discs that
are multi-angle compatible when the angle mark appears on the screen.

The audio language can be changed for
discs with multiple audio languages.

1 Select “Angle”.
2 Each time “Angle” is selected, the angle

1 Select “Audio”.
2 Each time “Audio” is selected, another

is changed.

 The angles available are restricted to those
available on the DVD disc.

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE
LANGUAGE
The subtitle language can be changed
for discs with multiple subtitle languages.

1 Select “Subtitle”.
2 Each time “Subtitle” is selected, another language available on the disc is selected.

 The languages available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.
 When “Hide” is selected, the subtitles can
be hidden.

240

LS460_600h_Navi_U

language available on the disc is selected.

 The languages available are restricted to
those available on the DVD disc.

SEARCHING FOR A TITLE OR
CHAPTER
DVD video

1 Select “Search”.
AVCHD video

1 Select “Title Search” or “Chapter
Search”.

2 Enter the title number or chapter number, and select “OK”.

 The player starts playing video for that title
or chapter number.

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

AVCHD VIDEO OPTIONS

1 Press the “OPTION” button.
2 Check that the following screen is displayed.

No.

Function

Page

DVD only: Select to display
the initial setup screen.

238

Select to turn off the option
screen.



Select to display the next or
previous page.



 During playback: Select
and hold to fast forward.
 During a pause: Select
and hold to slow forward.



Select to play/pause.



Select to stop.



Select and hold to rewind.



Select to display the top
menu screen.



Select to change the subtitle language.

240

Select to change the audio
language.

240

Select to return to a predetermined scene.



Select to search for a chapter.

240

Select to search for a title.

240

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

241

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

5. Blu-ray Disc (BD-Video AND BDAV)
OVERVIEW
This system can play Blu-ray Disc (BD) videos with digital sound.
In addition to commercial BD titles, BDAV videos can be played on this system, therefore digital TV recorded by home digital video recorders can also be played on this
system.
The disc operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Press the “SOURCE” button and select “Rear-DISC”.
Inserting a disc (P.222)
■ REMOTE CONTROLLER
When the cover is closed

When the cover is opened

242

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

No.

Function
Press to select a chapter.
BD-Video only: Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
BDAV only: Press and hold to select a program/playlist.
Press to play/pause.
 During playback: Press and hold to fast forward.
 During a pause: Press and hold to slow forward.
4

Press to stop.

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

BD-Video only: Press to display the pop-up menu screen.
Press to display the option screen. (P.244, 248)
BD-Video only: Press to display the top menu screen.
Press and hold to fast rewind.
BD-Video only: Color buttons
BD-Video only: 10 key buttons
INFORMATION
● Some BD-Video discs have a local storage feature which allows the disc’s additional infor-

mation, such as resume information, to be stored. This additional information can be utilized
when BD-Video is being played. Refer to the manual that came with the BD-Video disc to
see whether it has a local storage feature. If it does, the local storage feature can be enabled
by inserting an SD card into this system.
● If an SD card with existing data, is inserted, BD-Video disc information will not be stored on
the SD card in order to protect the data on the SD card. To enable the local storage feature,
use an SD card that does not have any data on it.

243

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

BD-VIDEO OPTIONS

1 Press the “OPTION” button.
2 Check that the following screen is displayed.

244

LS460_600h_Navi_U

No.

Function

Page

Select to display the initial
setup screen.

238

Select to turn off the option
screen.



Select to display the next or
previous page.



 During playback: Select
and hold to fast forward.
 During a pause: Select
and hold to slow forward.



Select to play/pause.



Select to stop.



Select and hold to rewind.



Select to display the popup menu.

245

Select to display the top
menu screen.



Select to change the angle.

245

Select to change the subtitle language.

246

Select to change the audio
language.

246

Select to return to a predetermined scene.



Select to search for a chapter.

246

Select to search for a title.

246

Select to change the secondary audio.

246

Select to display the secondary video (Picture-inpicture).

247

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

No.

Function

Page

Select to display the 10 key
pad.

247

Select to display the color
key buttons.

247

DISPLAYING THE POP-UP
MENU
Some BD-Video discs have a pop-up
navigation menu that can be called up
and be operated on the screen without
interrupting playback.

1 Select “Pop-up Menu”.
2 Select the menu item using the , ,

 or  on the “ENT” button, and press
CHANGING THE ANGLE

The angle can be changed for discs that
are multi-angle compatible when the angle mark appears on the screen.

1 Select “Angle”.
2 Each time “Angle” is selected, the angle
changes.

 The angles available are restricted to those
available on the BD disc.

245

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

the “ENT” button.

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE
LANGUAGE
The subtitle language can be changed
for discs with multiple subtitle languages.

1 Select “Subtitle”.
2 Each time “Subtitle” is selected, anoth-

er language available on the disc is selected.
“Hide”: Subtitle can be hidden
“Style”: Subtitle style can be changed.

CHANGING THE AUDIO
LANGUAGE
The audio language can be changed for
discs with multiple audio languages.

1 Select “Audio”.
2 Each time “Audio” is selected, another
language available on the disc is selected.

246

LS460_600h_Navi_U

SEARCHING FOR A TITLE OR
CHAPTER

1 Select “Title Search” or “Chapter
Search”.

2 Input the title number or chapter number, and select “OK”.

 The player starts playing video for that title
or chapter number.

CHANGING THE
SECONDARY AUDIO
The secondary audio that for the secondary video can be changed.

1 Select “PinP Audio”.
2 Each time “PinP Audio” is selected, an-

other secondary audio stored on the
disc is selected.
“OFF”: Select to turn the secondary audio
off

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

DISPLAYING THE
SECONDARY VIDEO
(PICTURE-IN-PICTURE)
Picture-in-picture is a secondary video
that plays embedded in the primary video. The secondary video can be played
from a disc compatible with the picturein-picture function.

The color button is used for various uses
according to directions of contents.

1 Select “Color Keys”.
2 Select the color button.

You can also press the color buttons (AD).
4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

1 Select “PinP”.
2 The secondary video is displayed on the

DISPLAYING THE COLOR
KEY BUTTONS

screen.
Each time “PinP” is selected, another
secondary video available on the disc is
selected.
“Hide”: Secondary video can be hidden.

DISPLAYING THE 10 KEY PAD
The 10 key pad is used when inputting
numbers according to directions of contents.

1 Select “Key Pad”.
2 Select the number button.

You can also press the 10 key buttons (10).

247

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

BDAV OPTIONS

1 Press the “OPTION” button.
2 Check that the following screen is displayed.

No.

Function

Page

Select to display the initial
setup screen.

238

Select to turn off the option
screen.



Select to display the next or
previous page.



 During playback: Select
and hold to fast forward.
 During a pause: Select
and hold to slow forward.



Select to play/pause.



Select to stop.



Select and hold to rewind.



Select to change the audio
channel.

249

Select to change the angle.

245

Select to change the audio
language.

246

Select to change the playback mode.

249

Select to search for a chapter.

246

Select to search for a title.

246

INFORMATION
● Depending on the disc, some buttons

may not be displayed on the screen.

248

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

CHANGING THE AUDIO
CHANNEL
The audio channel can be changed for
discs with multiple audio channels.

1 Select “MAIN/SUB”.
2 Each time “MAIN/SUB” is selected, the

The playback mode can be changed to
program mode or playlist mode. Playlist
mode cannot be selected if a playlist is
not stored on the disc.

1 Select “Playback Mode”.
2 Each time “Playback Mode” is select-

ed, the mode changes.
“Program”: Playback the disc in order of
program number
“Playlist”: Playback the disc in order of playlist number

249

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

mode changes in the following order:
“Main”: Main audio channel
“Sub”: Sub audio channel
“Main/Sub”: Both the main and sub audio
channels

CHANGING THE PLAYBACK
MODE

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

6. USB MEMORY
OVERVIEW
USB audio can be played on this system.
The USB memory operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “USB”.
Connecting a USB memory (P.145)
■ CONTROL SCREEN

250

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

■ REMOTE CONTROLLER

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

No.

Function
Select to set repeat playback. (P.252)
Select to set random playback. (P.252)
Press to select a file/track.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to play/pause.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to select a folder/album.

251

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

REPEATING
The file/track or folder/album currently
being listened to can be repeated.

1 Select

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:

When random playback is off

• file/track repeat  folder/album repeat
 off

When random playback is on
• file/track repeat  off

RANDOM ORDER
Files/tracks or folders/albums can be
automatically and randomly selected.

1 Select

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• random (1 folder/album random) 
folder/album random (all folder/album
random)  off

252

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

7. iPod
OVERVIEW
iPod audio and iPod video can be played on this system.
For viewing videos from an iPod, it is necessary to set the front audio/visual system’s
“Video Sound Input” to “A/V”. (P.200)
The iPod operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “iPod”.
Connecting an iPod (P.145)
4

■ CONTROL SCREEN

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
253

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

■ REMOTE CONTROLLER

No.

Function
Select to set repeat playback. (P.255)
Select to set random playback. (P.255)
Select to display the video screen.
To return to the audio screen, press the “SOURCE” button and select “Music”.
Press to select a track/file.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to play/pause.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

254

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

iPod AUDIO
REPEATING
The track currently being listened to can
be repeated.

1 Select

Tracks or albums can be automatically
and randomly selected.

1 Select

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• track shuffle  album shuffle  off

255

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• track repeat  off

RANDOM ORDER

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

8. Bluetooth® AUDIO
OVERVIEW
The Bluetooth® audio operation screen can be reached by the following method:
Press the “SOURCE” button and select “Bluetooth*”.
Connecting a Bluetooth® audio device (P.188)
■ CONTROL SCREEN

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
256

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

■ REMOTE CONTROLLER

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

No.

Function
Select to set repeat playback. (P.258)
Select to set random playback. (P.258)
Press to select a track.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to play/pause.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.

257

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

Bluetooth AUDIO
REPEATING
The track or album currently being listened to can be repeated.

1 Select

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• track repeat  album repeat  off

258

LS460_600h_Navi_U

RANDOM ORDER
Tracks or albums can be automatically
and randomly selected.

1 Select

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• album random  all track random  off

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

9. SD CARD
This system can play still pictures, music
and movies (SD video, AVCHD video,
etc.) that are stored on an SD card.
The SD operation screen can be
reached by the following method:
Press the “SOURCE” button and select
“Rear-SD”.
Inserting an SD card (P.223)

3 Select the desired mode.

No.

SELECTING THE SD MODE
“Rear-SD”.

2 Select “SD Menu”.

Page

Select to format the SD
card.
If the SD card is formatted,
all data on the card will be
erased.



Select to delete stored BDVideo data from the SD
card.



Select to play music.

260

Select to play still pictures.

263

Select to play SD video.

266

Select to play AVCHD
Video.

269

Select to play a movie.

266

259

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

1 Press the “SOURCE” button and select

Function

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

MUSIC
OVERVIEW
MP3/WMA/AAC files stored on an SD card can be played.
The SD music operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P.259
■ CONTROL SCREEN

260

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

■ REMOTE CONTROLLER

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

No.

Function
Select to set repeat playback. ( P.262)
Select to set random playback. (P.262)
Select to display the SD menu screen. ( P.259)
Press to select a file.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to play/pause.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to select a folder.
Press and hold “ ”, the top file stored in the top folder in the SD card will be selected.

261

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

SD MUSIC

■ RANDOM ORDER

■ REPEATING

Files or folders can be automatically and
randomly selected.

The file or folder currently being listened
to can be repeated.

1 Select

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:

When random playback is off

• file repeat  folder repeat  off

When random playback is on
• file repeat  off

262

LS460_600h_Navi_U

 Each time
is selected, the mode
changes as follows:
• random (1 folder random)  folder random (1 disc random)  off

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

PICTURE
OVERVIEW
Image files stored on an SD card can be displayed individually or in a slideshow.
The SD picture operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P.259
■ CONTROL SCREEN
4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
263

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

■ REMOTE CONTROLLER

No.

Function
Select to display the next/previous page.
Select to display the desired still picture.
 When the picture thumbnail list is displayed: Press to display the selected picture in full
screen.
 When a full screen picture is displayed: Press to display the picture thumbnail list.
When a full screen picture is displayed, press to display the option screen. (P.265)
When a full screen picture is displayed, press to change the displayed picture.

264

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

OPTION SCREEN

1 Press the “OPTION” button.
2 Check that the following screen is dis-

■ PICTURE SETTINGS SCREEN

1 Select “Setup”.
2 Select the items to be set.

played.

No.

Function
Select to turn off the option screen.
Select to start the slide show settings.
(P.265)
Select to display the picture list
screen.
Select to start a slideshow.
To end the slideshow, press the
“OPTION” or “ENT” button.
Select to display the current still picture information.

Function
Select to set slideshow interval time.
“5s”  “10s”  “15s”  “30s” 
“60s”
Select to set slideshow effect.
“Fade”  “Slide”  “Wipe1” 
“Wipe2”  “Dissolve”  “Zoom”
 “OFF”
Select to set repeat of the slideshow
on/off.
Select to restore the default settings.

3 Select “OK”.

Select to rotate the still picture.
Select to zoom on the still picture.

265

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

No.

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

VIDEO/MOVIE
OVERVIEW
SD videos/movies stored on an SD card can be played.
The SD video/movie operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
P.259
■ REMOTE CONTROLLER

No.

Function
Press to select a file/chapter.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to play/pause.
 During playback: Press and hold to fast forward.
 During a pause: Press and hold to slow forward.
Press to stop.
Press to display the option screen. (P.267)
Press and hold to fast rewind.

266

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

VIDEO/MOVIE OPTIONS

No.

Function

Page

Select to turn off the option
screen.



Select to display the next or
previous page.



 During playback: Select
and hold to fast forward.
 During a pause: Select
and hold to slow forward.



Select to play/pause.



Select to stop.



Select and hold to rewind.



Select to display the file information.



Select to change the audio
channel.

268

Select to change the playback mode.

268

Select to search for a chapter.

268

Select to search for a title.

268

1 Press the “OPTION” button.
2 Check that the following screen is displayed.

INFORMATION
● Depending on the data stored on the SD

card, some buttons may not be displayed
on the screen.

267

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

*: SD Video only

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

■ CHANGING THE AUDIO CHANNEL
The audio channel can be changed for
videos with multiple audio channels.

1 Select “Multiplexed Audio”.
2 Each time “Audio” is selected, the mode

changes in the following order:
“Main”: Main audio channel
“Sub”: Sub audio channel
“Main/Sub”: Both the main and sub audio
channels

■ CHANGING
MODE

THE

PLAYBACK

The playback mode can be changed to
program mode or playlist mode. Playlist
mode cannot be selected if a playlist is
not stored on the disc.

1 Select “Playback Mode”.
2 Each time “Playback Mode” is select-

ed, the mode changes.
“Program”: Playback the disc in order of
program number
“Playlist”: Playback the disc in order of playlist number

268

LS460_600h_Navi_U

■ SEARCHING FOR A TITLE OR
CHAPTER

1 Select “Title Search” or “Chapter
Search”.

2 Enter the title or chapter number and
select “OK”.

 The player starts playing video for that title
or chapter number.

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

VIDEO (SD AVCHD)
OVERVIEW
SD Videos (AVCHD videos) stored on an SD card can be played.
The SD video (AVCHD) operation screen can be reached by the following methods: P.259
■ REMOTE CONTROLLER

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM
269

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

No.

Function
Press to select a chapter.
Press and hold to fast forward/rewind.
Press to play/pause.
 During playback: Press and hold to fast forward.
 During a pause: Press and hold to slow forward.
Press to stop.
Press to display the option screen. (P.241)
Press to display the top menu screen.
Press and hold to fast rewind.

270

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM OPERATION

10. EXTERNAL DEVICES
OVERVIEW

271

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

The rear seat entertainment system plays videos and sound when audio/visual equipment is connected to the A/V input port.
The external devices operation screen can be reached by the following methods:
Press the “SOURCE” button, and select “AUX”, “External”, “Rear-External” or
“Rear-HDMI”.
Connecting a external device
The front player: P.145
The rear player: P.223
Selecting a input port to use (VTR input port or HDMI input port)
Press the “INPUT” button.

9. SETUP FOR REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

1. REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM SETTINGS
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

DISPLAYING THE SETTING
SCREEN

The screen image quality, such as the
brightness and contrast levels, can be
adjusted. Adjustable items depend on
the selected input source.

1 Press the “SETTING” button.

1 Display the settings screen. (P.272)
2 Select the “Display” tab.

2 Select the tab to be set.

No.

Function

Page

Select to adjust the screen.

272

Select to change the
screen size.

274

Select to tilt the display.

274

*: With overhead display

272

LS460_600h_Navi_U

9. SETUP FOR REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

3 Select the item to be set.

No.

Function
Select to switch between NTSC/
PAL input format. (PAL: indicator
on, NTSC: indicator off)

No.

Function

Select to darken
the screen.

“Brightness” “+”

Select to brighten the screen.

“Contrast” “-”

Select to weaken the contrast.

“Contrast” “+”

Select
strengthen
contrast.

to
the

“Color” “R”

Select
strengthen
red color.

to
the

“Color” “G”

Select
to
strengthen the
green color.

“Tone” “-”

Select to weaken the tone.

“Tone” “+”

Select
to
Strengthen the
tone.

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

“Brightness” “-”

Select to turn on/off the “LCD AI”.
The “LCD AI” automatically determines the tone of the video image
and sets the contrast to an optimum
level, displaying a sharp image.
Select to turn the display off (with
rear console display).
To turn it on, press the “DISC”,
“SETTING”, “SOURCE” or “INPUT” button.
273

LS460_600h_Navi_U

9. SETUP FOR REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

CHANGING THE SCREEN
SIZE
The screen size can be changed for
each input mode individually.
Depending on the audio source, some
functions may not be available.

TILTING THE DISPLAY (WITH
OVERHEAD DISPLAY)

1 Display the settings screen. (P.272)
2 Select the “Tilt” tab.
3 Select the item to be set.

1 Display the settings screen. (P.272)
2 Select the “Screen Size” tab.
3 Select the desired screen size.

No.

Function
Select to display the screen at the
original ratio.
Select to widen the 4:3 aspect
screen horizontally to fill the screen.

274

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Function
Select to adjust the display angle.
The display angle is memorized and
will be recalled when the engine
switch is turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Select to turn automatic closing of
the display on/off.
If “Auto Close” is on, the display will
automatically close when the engine
switch is turned off.
The display will automatically open
when the engine switch is
turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode again.

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

1. OPERATING INFORMATION
CAUTION
● When the rear seat entertainment system

● Cleaning the display: Wipe the display

with a dry soft cloth. If the screen is wiped
with a rough cloth, the surface of the
screen may be scratched.
● To prevent damage to the remote controller:
• Keep the remote controller away from
direct sunlight, heat and high humidity.
• Do not drop or strike the remote controller against hard objects.
• Do not sit on or place heavy objects on
the remote controller.
● BD/DVD/CD player: Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the BD/DVD/
CD player. Do not insert anything other
than a disc into the slot.
● Closing the display (with overhead display): Do not close the display using your
hand. Doing so may result in a malfunction.
● For normal operation after replacing the
battery: Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
• Always work with dry hands. Moisture
may cause the battery to rust.
• Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote controller.
• Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

275

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

is not used (with overhead display): Keep
the display closed. In the event of an accident or sudden braking, the opened display may hit an occupant’s body, resulting
in injury.
● To prevent accidents and electric shock:
Do not disassemble or modify the remote
controller.
● When the remote controller is not used:
Stow the remote controller. Injuries may
result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
● Closing the display (with overhead display): Never use any part of your body to
intentionally activate the jam protection
function.
● Removed battery and other parts: These
parts are small and if swallowed by a child
they can cause choking. Keep away from
children. Failure to do so could result in
death or serious injury.

NOTICE

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

CAUTION SCREEN
A caution screen appears for a few seconds
when the rear display turns on.
During this time, only the “OPEN/CLOSE”
button can be operated (with overhead display).

■ WHEN THE REMOTE CONTROLLER BATTERIES ARE FULLY DEPLETED

1 Remove the cover.

WHEN APPEARS ON THE
SCREEN
indicates that the selected icon cannot
be used at this time.

THE REMOTE CONTROLLER

2 Remove the depleted batteries and install new batteries.

■ BEFORE USING THE REMOTE
CONTROLLER (FOR NEW VEHICLE OWNERS)

1 Remove the insulating sheet before using the remote controller.

■ IF THE REMOTE CONTROLLER
BATTERIES ARE DISCHARGED
The following symptoms may occur.

INFORMATION
● An insulating sheet is set to prevent the

batteries from being depleted.

276

LS460_600h_Navi_U

 The remote controller will not function
properly.
 The operational range is reduced.

■ USE TWO AA BATTERIES
 Batteries can be purchased at Lexus dealer,
electric appliance shop, or camera stores.
 Replace only with the same or equivalent
type recommended by Lexus dealer.
 Dispose of used batteries according to the
local laws.

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

HEADPHONES
Infrared wireless headphones can also be
used. However, with some headphones
generally available in the market, it may be
difficult to catch signals properly. Lexus recommends the use of Lexus genuine wireless
headphones.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
4

VOLUME

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

 Adjust the volume when you connect the
headphone to the jack. Loud sounds may
have a significant impact on the human
body.
 Conversational speech on some BD/
DVDs is recorded at a low volume to
emphasize the impact of sound effects. If
you adjust the volume assuming that the
conversations represent the maximum volume level that the BD/DVD will play, you
may be startled by louder sound effects or
when you change to a different audio
source. Be sure to adjust the volume with
this in mind.

277

LS460_600h_Navi_U

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

COPYRIGHTS AND TRADEMARKS
 Blu-ray Disc, Blu-ray, BD-Live, BDXL, and the logos are trademarks of the Blu-ray
Disc Association.

 Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.

 “AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive” logo are trademarks
of Panasonic Corporation and Sony Corporation.

 “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.

 SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.

 Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

278

LS460_600h_Navi_U

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

 For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS
Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS-HD Master Audio | Essential is a trademark of DTS, Inc. 
DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

 This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 patent portfolio license, AVC patent portfolio license and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal use of a consumer or
other uses in which it does not receive remuneration to
(i) encode video in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard, AVC Standard and
VC-1 Standard (“MPEG-4/AVC/VC-1 Video”) and/or
(ii) decode MPEG-4/AVC/VC-1 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a
personal activity and/or was obtained from a video provider licensed to provide
MPEG-4/AVC/VC-1 Video.
No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use.
Additional information may be obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C. See http://
www.mpegla.com.

279

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

 The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing, LLC in the United States
and other countries.

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

 Cinavia Notice
This product uses Cinavia technology to limit the use of unauthorized copies of some
commercially-produced film and videos and their soundtracks. When a prohibited use
of an unauthorized copy is detected, a message will be displayed and playback or copying will be interrupted.
More information about Cinavia technology is provided at the Cinavia Online Consumer Information Center at http://www.cinavia.com. To request additional information
about Cinavia by mail, send a postcard with your mailing address to: Cinavia Consumer
Information Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA.
 This product incorporates proprietary technology under license from Verance Corporation and is protected by U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and other U.S. and worldwide patents
issued and pending as well as copyright and trade secret protection for certain aspects
of such technology. Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Corporation. Copyright 20042014 Verance Corporation. All rights reserved by Verance. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
 WMA (Windows Media Audio), Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is
prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and
third parties.
 This item incorporates copy protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and
other intellectual property rights of Rovi Corporation. Reverse engineering and disassembly are prohibited.

280

LS460_600h_Navi_U

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

281

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

 This product incorporates the following software:
(1) the software developed independently by or for Panasonic Corporation,
(2) the software owned by third party and licensed to Panasonic Corporation,
(3) the software licensed under the GNU General Public License, Version 2 (GPL V2),
(4) the software licensed under the GNU LESSER General Public License, Version 2.1
(LGPL v2.1) and/or,
(5) open sourced software other than the software licensed under the GPL v2 and/or
LGPL v2.1
For the software categorized as (3) and (4), please refer to the terms and conditions of
GPL v2 and LGPL v2.1, as the case may be at
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl-2.0.html and
http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html.
In addition, the software categorized as (3) and (4) are copyrighted by several
individuals. Please refer to the copyright notice of those individuals at
http://car.panasonic.jp/oss/44bu9ph2/
The GPL/LGPL software is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
ANY WARRANTY, without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
At least three (3) years from delivery of products, we will give to any third party who
contacts us at the contact information provided below, for a charge no more than our
cost of physically performing source code distribution, a complete machine-readable
copy of the corresponding source code covered under GPL v2/LGPL v2.1.
[Contact address]
Engineering Administration Group Manager Panasonic Corporation
4261 Ikonobe-cho, Tsuzuki-ku, Yokohama City 224-8520, Japan
Source code is also freely available to you and any other member of the public via our
website bellow.
http://car.panasonic.jp/oss/44bu9ph2/
For the software categorized as (5) includes as follows.
1. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)
2. This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley
and its contributors.
3. Free Type code.
4. The Independent JPEG Group’s JPEG software.
5. Vera Fonts. (http://www.gnome.org/fonts/)

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

CD/DVD/Blu-ray Disc
PLAYER AND DISCS
CAUTION:

Discs with the marks shown below can be
used.
Playback may not be possible depending on
recording format or disc features, or due to
scratches, dirt or deterioration.

THIS PRODUCT IS A CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT. USE OF CONTROL
OR ADJUSTMENTS OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER
THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN
MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. DO NOT
OPEN COVERS AND DO NOT REPAIR YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
DISCS THAT CAN BE USED
CAUTION
● BD/DVD video precaution: Conversa-

tional speech on some BDs/DVDs is
recorded at a low volume to emphasize
the impact of sound effects. If you adjust
the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum volume
level that the BD/DVD will play, you may
be startled by louder sound effects or
startled when you change to a different
audio source. Loud sounds may have a
significant impact on the human body or
pose a driving hazard. Keep this in mind
when you adjust the volume.

282

LS460_600h_Navi_U

The following discs cannot be used on this
system:
• BDXL disc
• BD-RE with the cartridge
• HD DVD
• DVD-Audio
• SACD

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

NOTICE
● Player precautions: Failure to follow the

precautions below may result in damage
to the discs or the player itself.
• Do not insert anything other than discs
into the disc slot.
• Do not apply oil to the player.
• Store discs away from direct sunlight.
• Never try to disassemble any part of the
player.

NOTICE
• Discs with a transparent or translucent
recording area

● Discs and adapters that cannot be used:

Do not use the following types of discs.
Also, do not use 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters, Dual Discs or printable discs.
Doing so may damage the player and/or
disc insert/eject function.
• Discs that have a diameter that is not
4.7 in (12 cm)

• Discs that have tape, stickers or CD-R
labels attached to them, or that have
had the label peeled off

• Low-quality or deformed discs

283

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

NOTICE

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

ABOUT MP3/WMA/AAC FILES AND COMPATIBILITY
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3), WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) is a standard audio compression format.
There is a limit to the MP3, WMA and AAC file standards and to the media/formats
recorded by them that can be used.

■ MP3 FILE COMPATIBILITY
Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

Compatible bit rates

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps)
(compatible with VBR)

Compatible channel modes

stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and mono

ID3 tags

ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.3 and Ver. 2.4 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

■ WMA FILE COMPATIBILITY
Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2)

Compatible sampling frequencies

8, 11.025, 16, 22.05, 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

Compatible bit rates

Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2): CBR 5-320 (kbps)
(only compatible with 2-channel playback)

284

LS460_600h_Navi_U

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

■ AAC FILE COMPATIBILITY
Compatible standards

MPEG2/AAC-LC, MPEG4/AAC-LC
(ADIF is not supported)

Compatible sampling frequencies

ADTS (MPEG2 AAC): 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MP4 (MPEG4 AAC): 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

Compatible bit rates

ADTS (MPEG2 AAC): 8-384 (kbps)
MP4 (MPEG4 AAC): 8-384 (kbps)

Compatible channel mode

ADTS (MPEG2 AAC): 1/0, 2/0, 3/0, 2/1, 2/2, 3/1, 3/2.1
MP4 (MPEG4 AAC): 1/0, 2/0, 3/0, 2/1, 2/2, 3/1, 3/2.1

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

■ COMPATIBLE MEDIA AND DISC FORMATS
Compatible media

CD-ROM/R/RW
DVD-ROM/R/RW

Disc formats

CD-ROM Mode 1,
CD-ROM XA Mode 2 Form 1

File formats

ISO9660 Level 1, 2
(Romeo, Joliet, RockRidge), UDF (1.02, 1.50, 2.00, 2.01)

Maximum directory hierarchy

8 levels

Maximum length of folder
names/file names

The number of the maximum indication letters by design specifications of the indication machine side
(support proportional font, and there are distinction of the half
size and full size)

Maximum number of folders

255
(including the root)

Maximum number of files per
disc

512

285

LS460_600h_Navi_U

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

■ FILE NAMES
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA/AAC and played are those with
the extension .mp3, .wma or .m4a.
■ MULTI-SESSIONS
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play discs that
contain MP3, WMA and AAC files.
■ MP3, WMA AND AAC PLAYBACK

 When a disc containing MP3, WMA or AAC files is inserted, all files on the disc are first
checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3, WMA or AAC file is played. To
make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you do not write inany files
other than MP3, WMA or AAC files or create any unnecessary folders.If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3, WMA or AAC format data, only music data can
be played.
 To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit rate of 128 kbps
and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
 Playback may not be possible in some instances, depending on the characteristics of
the disc.
 There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3, WMA or
AAC files on the market, and depending on the status of the encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.
 When files other than MP3, WMA or AAC files are recorded on a disc, it may take
more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

■ EXTENSIONS
If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, WMA and
AAC files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3, WMA and AAC
files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers.

286

LS460_600h_Navi_U

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

DYNAMIC RANGE
“Dynamic Range” can be set only when
Dolby Digital or Dolby TrueHD is selected.
When Dolby TrueHD is selected, the dynamic range is the same as “MAX” even
when set to “MIN”. (P.239)

BD-Video SECONDARY
AUDIO

 There is no interactive audio
 There is no secondary audio
 There are no BD-J titles

If BD-Video secondary audio is set to off,
HD sound can be output. However, for sections that have secondary audio recorded,
secondary audio will not be output.

BD/DVD VIDEO DISCS
■ COMPATIBLE MEDIA
Media that can be used for playback are
BD-ROMs, BD-Rs, BD-REs, DVD-ROMs,
DVD-Rs and DVD-RWs.

● When storing content on BD-R, BD-RE,

DVD-R or DVD-RW discs, they must be
finalized using a recorder. Discs that are
not finalized cannot be played by this system.
● Discs that are recorded with multi session
cannot be played by this system.
● BD-Live is not supported.

■ THE COLOR TV FORMATS
This player conforms to NTSC/PAL color
TV formats.
■ REGION CODES
Some BD/DVD video discs have a region
code indicating the region in which you can
use the BD/DVD video disc.
If the BD-Video disc is not labeled “A” or
“ABC” or if the DVD video disc is not labeled “1” or “ALL”, you cannot use it on this
player.
Depending on the disc production company, some Blu-ray Disc may be designed to
not be able to be played in some countries
and regions.
If you attempt to play BD/DVD video discs
with incompatible region codes on this player, an error message appears on the screen.
Even if the BD/DVD video disc does not
have a region code, in some cases it cannot
be used.

■ COMPATIBLE DISC FORMATS
Disc formats that can be used for playback
are BD-Video formats, BDAV formats,
AVCHD formats, and DVD video formats.

287

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

If BD-Video secondary audio is set to on,
secondary audio is output during sections
that have secondary audio recorded. During these sections, HD sound, such as 7.1 ch
audio, will not be output.
However, if you are playing sections that
meet all of the following conditions, HD
sound can be output:

INFORMATION

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

■ MARKS SHOWN ON BD/DVD
VIDEO DISCS
Mark

Meaning

PAL/NTSC

Indicates compatibility with PAL/NTSC
format color TVs
Indicates the number of audio tracks
Indicates the number of language subtitles
Indicates the number of angles
Indicates the screen
display ratios available
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates the disc’s
region code
 BD-Video
“ABC”: all regions
Alphabet: region
code
 DVD video
“ALL”: all regions
Number: region
code

288

LS460_600h_Navi_U

BD/DVD VIDEO DISC
INFORMATION
■ PARENTAL CONTROLS
This feature limits what can be viewed in
conformity with the level of restrictions of
the country. The level of restrictions varies
depending on the BD/DVD video disc.
Some BD/DVD video discs cannot be
played at all, or violent scenes are skipped
or replaced with other scenes.
DVD VIDEO
Level 1

DVD video discs for children can be played.

Level 2 - 7

DVD video discs for children and G-rated movies
can be played.

Level 8

All types of DVD video discs
can be played.

BD-VIDEO
Parental controls of BD-Videos can be set
up by inputting an age. If the target age of
BD-Video exceeds the age restriction that
was set up, then playback will not be possible.

■ MULTI-ANGLE FEATURE
You can enjoy the same scene from different angles.
■ MULTI-LANGUAGE OPTION
You can select the subtitle and audio languages.

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

■ REGION CODES
The region codes are provided on BD/
DVD players and BD/DVD discs. If the BD/
DVD disc does not have the same region
code as the BD/DVD player, you cannot
play the disc on the player.

■ AVCHD
AVCHD is a new format (standard) for
high definition video cameras that can
record and play high-resolution HD images.
DVDs and SD cards with videos recorded
in AVCHD format can be used on this
system.
■ BDAV (Blu-ray Disc AUDIO/VISUAL)
BDAV is one of the audio/visual recording
formats for Blu-ray Disc, has been made
primarily for the purpose of broadcasting
the recording.
It is used when recording to BD-R and BDRE by Blu-ray Disc recorder.

■ POP-UP MENU
Some BD-Video discs have a pop-up navigation menu that can be called up and be
operated on the screen without interrupting
4
playback.
■ PICTURE-IN-PICTURE
This is a function of BD-Video that plays the
primary video and secondary video simultaneously. For instance, the function is capable of playing the original movie as the
primary video while playing video commentary from the film director on a small screen
as a secondary video.
■ DUBA (DISC UNBOUND BD·J APPLICATION)
For BD-Videos that come as a 2 disc set or
more, after finishing and ejecting one of the
discs, continuation of the video can be seen
shortly after replacing the disc with the
proper disc.
■ PLAYLIST (BDAV ONLY)
A playlist of favorite scenes by Blu-ray
Disc recorder can be created and the
scenes can playback via playlist.
AUDIO
This player can play Linear PCM, Dolby
Digital, DTS and MPEG audio format. Other decoded types cannot be played.

289

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

■ TITLE AND CHAPTER
Video and audio stored on BD/DVD video
discs are divided into parts by title and
chapter.
Title: The largest portion of the video and
audio stored on BD/DVD video discs. Usually, one movie, one album, or one audio
program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A title comprises of one or more
chapters.

■ BD-J
Some BD-Video discs contain Java applications, and these applications are called
BD-J. You can enjoy various interactive
features in addition to playing normal video.

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

LANGUAGE CODES LIST
Code

Language

Code

Language

0514

English

0515

Esperanto

Code

Language

1214

Lingala

Code

Language

1913

Samoan

1001

Japanese

0520

Estonian

1215

Laotian

1914

Shona

0618

French

0521

Basque

1220

Lithuanian

1915

Somali

0405

German

0601

Persian

1222

Latvian, Lettish

1917

Albanian

0920

Italian

0609

Finnish

1307

Malagasy

1918

Serbian

0519

Spanish

0610

Fiji

1309

Maori

1919

Siswati

2608

Chinese

0615

Faroese

1311

Macedonian

1920

Sesotho

1412

Dutch

0625

Frisian

1312

Malayalam

1921

Sundanese

1620

Portuguese

0701

Irish

1314

Mongolian

1923

Swahili

1922

Swedish

0704

Scottish-Gaelic

1315

Moldavian

2001

Tamil

1821

Russian

0712

Galician

1318

Marathi

2005

Telugu

1115

Korean

0714

Guarani

1319

Malay

2007

Tajik

0512

Greek

0721

Gujarati

1320

Maltese

2008

Thai

0101

Afar

0801

Hausa

1325

Burmese

2009

Tigrinya

0102

Abkhazian

0809

Hindi

1401

Nauru

2011

Turkmen

0106

Afrikaans

0818

Croatian

1405

Nepali

2012

Tagalog

0113

Amharic

0821

Hungarian

1415

Norwegian

2014

Setswana

0118

Arabic

0825

Armenian

1503

Occitan

2015

Tongan

0119

Assamese

0901

Interlingua

1513

(Afan) Oromo

2018

Turkish

0125

Aymara

0905

Interlingue

1518

Oriya

2019

Tsonga

0126

Azerbaijani

0911

Inupiak

1601

Punjabi

2020

Tatar

2023

Twi

0201

Bashkir

0914

Indonesian

1612

Polish

0205

Byelorussian

0919

Icelandic

1619

Pashto, Pushto

2111

Ukrainian

0207

Bulgarian

0923

Hebrew

1721

Quechua

2118

Urdu

0208

Bihari

1009

Yiddish

1813

Rhaeto-Romance

2126

Uzbek

0209

Bislama

1023

Javanese

1814

Kirundi

2209

Vietnamese

0214

Bengali, Bangla

1101

Georgian

1815

Romanian

2215

Volapük

0215

Tibetan

1111

Kazakh

1823

Kinyarwanda

2315

Wolof

0218

Breton

1112

Greenlandic

1901

Sanskrit

2408

Xhosa

0301

Catalan

1113

Cambodian

1904

Sindhi

2515

Yoruba

0315

Corsican

1114

Kannada

1907

Sango

2621

Zulu

0319

Czech

1119

Kashmiri

1908

Serbo-Croatian

0325

Welsh

1121

Kurdish

1909

Sinhalese

0401

Danish

1125

Kirghiz

1911

Slovak

0426

Bhutani

1201

Latin

1912

Slovenian

290

LS460_600h_Navi_U

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

SD CARD

NOTICE

SD CARDS THAT CAN BE
USED
 Memory cards are restricted to the following sizes based on SD standards.
From 512 MB to 2 GB

SDHC

From 4 GB to 32 GB

SDXC

From 48 GB to 256 GB

 Mini SD cards and Micro SD cards can be
used, but must be used with an adaptor
card.
 MultiMedia Card (MMC) cannot be used.

CAUTION
● SD cards: Keep away from children.

These are small and if swallowed by a
child they can cause choking.

precautions below may result in damage
to the SD cards or the SD card slot.
• Do not insert anything other than an SD
card into the SD card slot.
• Do not stick labels or stickers on SD
card. There is a possibility that it may
become impossible to eject the SD card
from inside the slot.
• Do not handle an SD card with wet
hands. Doing so may cause electric
shock or a malfunction.
• Do not allow hands or metal objects to
contact the interface pins of SD cards.
• Do not place SD cards on the instrument panel, on any place with direct
sunlight or in areas with a lot of moisture.
• Do not use SD cards in any place where
static electricity or electric noise
adversely affects SD cards. This may
cause data corruption or data loss.
• Always place the SD card in its storage
case when not in use.

291

LS460_600h_Navi_U

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

● SD card precaution: Failure to follow the

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

SD CARD FUNCTIONS
 Local storage
• Some BD videos have a feature to memorize disc information, such as a resume
point, in a local storage. The rear seat
entertainment system uses an SD card as
a local storage device. To use this function, insert an SD card into the SD card
slot.
• The SD card memory function may differ
depending on the BD videos played.
• When an SD card that contains any kind
of data is inserted, BD video disc information will not be stored into the SD card to
protect the existing data in the card. To
use an SD card as a local storage, use
another SD card that does not contain
any data.

292

LS460_600h_Navi_U

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

COMPATIBILITY
■ COMPATIBLE FILES
Music file format

MP3/WMA/AAC file types: P.284

Video file format

MPEG-4 Video, H.264/AVC Video (.mp4/.m4v),
MPEG-2 Video (.mpg), Windows Media Video (.wmv),
AVI container (.avi)

Photo file format

JPEG (Gray scale JPEG and Motion JPEG are not supported.)

Pixel size (photo)

Between 1 x 1 and 8192 x 8192 pixels

4
AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

■ MPEG-4
Profile

Simple Profile, Advanced Simple Profile

Video codec

MPEG-4 Video

Audio codec

MPEG-4 AAC-LC (AAC Low Complexity)

Resolution (pixel)

Maximum 1920 x 1080

Bit rate

Maximum 6Mbps

Frame rate

Interlaced video: Maximum 60 fps
Progressive video: Maximum 30 fps

■ H.264/AVC
Profile

Baseline Profile, Main Profile, High Profile

Video codec

H.264/AVC Video

Audio codec

MPEG-4 AAC-LC (AAC Low Complexity)

Resolution (pixel)

Maximum 1920 x 1080

Bit rate

Maximum 20Mbps

Frame rate

Interlaced video: Maximum 60 fps
Progressive video: Maximum 30 fps

293

LS460_600h_Navi_U

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

■ MPEG-2
Profile

MP@HL, MP@ML

Video codec

MPEG-2 PS (Program Stream)

Audio codec

MPEG-1 Audio Layer 2, Dolby Digital

Resolution (pixel)

Maximum 1920 x 1080

Bit rate

Maximum 12Mbps

Frame rate

Interlaced video: Maximum 60 fps
Progressive video: Maximum 30 fps

■ WINDOWS MEDIA VIDEO (WMV)
Profile

Simple Profile, Main Profile, Advanced Profile

Video codec

WMV (VC-1)

Audio codec

WMA (WMA Professional and Lossless are not supported.)

Resolution (pixel)

Maximum 1920 x 1080

Bit rate

Simple and Main Profile: Maximum 15Mbps
Advanced Profile: Maximum 20Mbps

Frame rate

Interlaced video: Maximum 60 fps
Progressive video: Maximum 30 fps

294

LS460_600h_Navi_U

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

■ AVI CONTAINER
Profile

Refer to other tables in this section for compatible MPEG-4, H.264/AVC
and WMV profiles.
Video: H.264/AVC Video
Audio: MPEG-4 AAC-LC, MP3

To be played
back video and
audio codec

Video: MPEG-4 Video
Audio: MPEG-4 AAC-LC, MP3
Video: WMV (VC-1)
Audio: MP3

Maximum 1920 x 1080

Bit rate

Refer to other tables in this section for compatible MPEG-4, H.264/AVC
and WMV profiles.

Frame rate

Interlaced video: Maximum 60 fps
Progressive video: Maximum 30 fps

■ SD-VIDEO H.264 MOBILE VIDEO PROFILE
Profile

Baseline Profile

Video codec

H.264/AVC Video

Audio codec

MPEG-4 AAC

Resolution (pixel)

640 x 480 and 640 x 360

Bit rate

Video: Maximum 1.5Mbps,
Audio: Maximum 128kbps

Frame rate

30 fps

INFORMATION
● For information on how to create a video file, refer to the manual that comes with the

encoder software to be used. Depending on the encoder software used, some video files
may not be played back.

295

LS460_600h_Navi_U

AUDIO/VISUAL SYSTEM

Resolution (pixel)

10. TIPS FOR OPERATING REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

SD CARDS
 An SD card is not provided with the rear
seat entertainment system and needs to be
purchased separately.
 Compatible formats: This system is compatible with SD memory cards that meet
SD card specifications FAT16 formats,
SDHC memory cards in FAT32 format,
and SDXC memory cards in exFAT format.
 Panasonic SD memory card format software version 4.0 or higher is recommended.
 Data stored on an SD card may be lost.
Before playing back pictures and videos
stored on an SD card, make certain to back
up the data.
 Before an SD card that contains any kind of
data is played, slide the lock switch on the
SD card to “LOCK” in order to prevent any
data from being accidentally deleted or
overwritten.
 When discarding or transferring ownership
of an SD card: When using format or delete
functions on this system or a personal computer, file management data changes but
the data on the SD card is not completely
erased. Destroying the body of the SD card
or using commercial computer software
that erases data is recommended when discarding or transferring ownership of an SD
card to completely erase the data stored on
the card. The management of data stored
on an SD card is the customer’s responsibility.

296

LS460_600h_Navi_U

A/V INPUT PORT
OPERATING AUDIO/VISUAL
EQUIPMENT CONNECTED
TO THE SYSTEM
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other operations
must be made on the audio/visual equipment itself.
For details about operation of audio/visual
equipment, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTICE
● When the A/V input port is not in use:

Keep the A/V input port cover closed.
Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug may cause electrical failure or
a short circuit.

INFORMATION
● HDMI compatible format

• Compatible video signal:
480p, 576p,VGA
• Compatible sound signal:
LPCM 2ch

5
1

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
2

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM ......... 298 4
USING THE VOICE COMMAND
SYSTEM .................................................................. 298
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION ....................................................... 299

2. CASUAL SPEECH
6
RECOGNIZATION............................ 305
3. COMMAND LIST................................... 306

MOBILE ASSISTANT
OPERATION

1. MOBILE ASSISTANT .............................. 311

297

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
The voice command system enables the
audio/visual, hands-free systems, etc. to
be operated using voice commands.
Refer to the command list for samples of
voice commands. (P. 306)

MICROPHONE

USING THE VOICE
COMMAND SYSTEM
STEERING SWITCH
 It is unnecessary to speak directly into the
microphone when giving a command.
INFORMATION

Talk switch
 Press the talk switch to start the voice command system.
 To cancel voice recognition, press and hold
the talk switch.

Back switch
 Press the back switch to return to the previous screen.

298

LS460_600h_Navi_U

●Wait for the confirmation beep before
speaking a command.
●Voice commands may not be recognized
if:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while voice commands are spoken.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned
towards the microphone.
●In the following conditions, the system
may not recognize the command properly and using voice commands may not
be possible:
• The command is incorrect or unclear.
Note that certain words, accents or
speech patterns may be difficult for the
system to recognize.
• There is excessive background noise,
such as wind noise.
●This system may not operate immediately
after the engine switch is turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
OPERATION
The voice command system is operated
by speaking commands corresponding
to each function. Commands can be
confirmed on the screen. The voice
command system can be operated from
either the main menu screen or shortcut
menu screen.
OPERATION FROM THE
MAIN MENU
 If the shortcut menu screen is displayed,
say “Main menu” or select “Main menu” to
display the main menu screen.
 Voice guidance for the voice command
system can be skipped by pressing the
talk switch.

2 Say the desired category name.
 All shortcut commands can be recognized
on this screens.
 To display the shortcut menu screen, say
“Shortcut menu” or select “Shortcut
menu”.

1 Press the talk switch.
 If the main menu screen is displayed, say
“Shortcut menu” or select “Shortcut menu”
to display the shortcut menu screen.
 Voice guidance for the voice command
system can be skipped by pressing the
talk switch.

2 Say the tab selection command or select the desired tab.

 All commands, including those which are
not displayed on the screen, can be recognized.
 Commands related to each function are
displayed on the screen of each function
tab. Some commonly used commands are
displayed on the shortcut tab screen. Say
“More Hints” to display more commonly
used commands.
 To display the main menu screen, say “Main
menu” or select “Main menu”.
 Saying “Help” prompts voice guidance to
offer examples of commands and operation methods.

 Saying “Help” or selecting “?” prompts
voice guidance to offer examples of
commands and operation methods.

3 Say or select the desired command on
the screen.

299

LS460_600h_Navi_U

5
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

1 Press the talk switch.

OPERATION FROM THE
SHORTCUTS

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

3 Say the desired command.
 Registered POIs, registered names in the
contacts list etc., can be said in the place of
the “<>” next to the commands. (P. 306)
For example: Say “Find nearby dining”,
“Call John Smith” etc.
 If a desired outcome is not shown, or if no
selections are available, perform one of the
following to return to the previous screen:
• Say “Go back”.
• Select “Go Back”.
• Press the back switch on the steering
wheel.
 To cancel voice recognition, select
or press and hold the talk switch.

300

LS460_600h_Navi_U

INFORMATION

●If the system does not respond or the
confirmation screen does not disappear,
press the talk switch and try again.
●If a voice command cannot be recognized, follow the voice guidance and say
the voice command again.
●If a voice command cannot be recognized 5 times consecutively, voice recognition will be canceled.
Press the talk switch to restart the voice
command system.
●“Display Voice Confirmations” can be set
on/off on the “Voice Settings” screen.
(P. 63)
●When “Display Voice Confirmations” is
set to on, voice recognition prompts will
be displayed for some voice commands
when recognized. If the recognized command is correct, say “Yes” or select “Yes”.
(Saying “No” or selecting “No” will display the previous screen.)
●When “Display Voice Confirmations” is
set to off, voice recognition prompts will
only be displayed for important voice
commands.
●If “Display Voice Confirmations” is set to
on and commands are generally recognized correctly, a confirmation screen
may be displayed asking if you would
wish to set “Display Voice Confirmations”
to off. To set to off, say “Yes” or select
“Yes”.
●“Voice Recognition Prompts” can be set
to on or off on the “Voice Settings”
screen. (P. 63)
●Voice guidance can be canceled by setting voice prompts to off. Use this setting
when it is desirable to say a command
immediately after pressing the talk switch
and hearing a beep.
●The “Side Display” cannot be operated
during voice recognition.

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

■ DISPLAYING THE “Voice Settings”
SCREENS

1 Select

 The “Voice Settings” screen will be displayed. (P. 63)

INCREASING THE VOICE
RECOGNITION
PERFORMANCE

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

 The user will be asked to say sample
phrases. This will help the voice command
system adapt to the user’s accent.

1 Press the talk switch.
2 Say “Launch ”.
 LEXUS App Suite application screen is displayed.

VOICE COMMAND
EXAMPLE: PERFORMING A
DESTINATION SEARCH BY
ADDRESS (ENGLISH AND
FRENCH ONLY)*

1 Press the talk switch.
2 Say “Enter an address”.
3 Say “” in succession.

 As voice commands spoken in French are
only available for addresses in Quebec,
Canada, it is not necessary to say “”
in French.

*: With navigation function
301

LS460_600h_Navi_U

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “Voice”.
4 Select “Train Voice Recognition”.

VOICE COMMAND
EXAMPLE: LAUNCH LEXUS
App Suite APPLICATION*

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

 A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results. If multiple
matching items are found, a selection
screen will be displayed. Say “” or
select the number.
 Some areas cannot be recognized by the
voice recognition system.
 If voice commands cannot be recognized
repeatedly, a confirmation screen may be
displayed asking if you would wish to call a
“Destination Assist” operator for help. (P.
400) To call an operator, say “Yes” or select
“Yes”. (Saying “No” or selecting “No” will
display the previous screen.)
 For information regarding the state/
province setting to perform a destination
search by address: P. 90

4 If the recognized address is correct, say
“Yes” or select “Yes”.

 To correct the city name, street name, or
house number, say “Change city”, “Change
street”, or “Change house number”. (Saying
“No” or “Go Back”, or selecting “No” or
“Go Back” will display the previous
screen.)

5 Say “Go directly” or select “Go Directly”.

 After this, follow the voice guidance and
search for a destination route by voice
command operation.

302

LS460_600h_Navi_U

INFORMATION

●The voice command recognition is
designed to recognize the main body of
the official street name.

For example: if the official street name is
“East Main Street”, the voice command
recognition will recognize “Main”.
●Say the desired number, cardinal direction etc. in the place of the “<>”.

For example: Say “West 555”.
●Inputting the house number can be
skipped.
●Even if the state set using voice recognition is different from the set state in the
“Address” screen (which was set when a
destination was set manually), the set
state in the “Address” screen will not
change. (P. 91)
●The house number voice recognition
conditions are outlined below:
• Numerals: 10 digits or less
• Numerals and cardinal direction or a
hyphen and numerals: A total of 9 digits or less (Do not say “and”.)
• Cardinal direction or a hyphen and
numerals: A total of 9 digits or less
(Do not say “and”.)
• Numerals are recognized as single
digits only.
• The cardinal direction and hyphens
are only recognized once.
• The following cardinal directions can
be recognized: North, East, West and
South.

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND
EXAMPLE: SEARCH FOR A
SONG

1 Press the talk switch.
2 Say “Play song ”.
 A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results. If multiple
matching items are found, a selection
screen will be displayed. Say “” or
select the number.
 The system starts playing music and the
song lists are displayed.

1 Press the talk switch.
2 Say “Call ”.
 A confirmation screen will be displayed
showing the recognition results. If multiple
matching items are found, a selection
screen will be displayed. Say “” or
select the number.
INFORMATION

●In the same manner as it is displayed on
the screen, “Call ”, after saying “Call a contact” say
the name, or the name and type of phone,
of a contact.
For example: “Call a contact”, “John
Smith” or “Call a contact”, “Mary Davis”,
“Mobile”
●There are 4 types of phones: Home,
Mobile, Office and Other.
●Short or abbreviated names in the contacts list may not be recognized. Change
names in the contacts list to full names.
●Sometimes a voice recognition result
confirmation screen will be displayed.
After confirming the result, say “Yes” or
“No”.
●When the system recognizes multiple
names from the contacts list, a name candidate list will be displayed on the screen.
If the desired name is not displayed on the
top of the screen, say or select the number of the name from the candidate list to
select a name from the candidate list.
●When a contact has multiple phone numbers registered in the contacts list, a candidate list will be displayed. If the desired
phone number is not displayed on the top
of the screen, say or select the number of
the desired phone number from the candidate list to select a phone number from
the candidate list.

303

LS460_600h_Navi_U

5
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

INFORMATION

●The Gracenote database is only compatible with the USB or iPod mode.
●The list screens can be operated by
selecting using the Remote Touch as well
as by recognizing the voice commands.
●A USB memory or iPod must be connected to enable track searching and
playback. (P. 176, 180)
●When a USB memory or iPod is connected, recognition data is created so
tracks can be searched using voice commands.
●Recognition data is updated under the
following conditions:
• When the USB memory or iPod data
has changed.
• When the voice recognition language is
changed. (P. 56)
●While the recognition data is being created or being updated, a track search
cannot be performed using a voice command.
●When the “Music” tab is disappeared on
the shortcut menu screen, it is not possible to search for a track using a voice
command.

VOICE COMMAND
EXAMPLE: CALL NAME

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

VOICE COMMAND
EXAMPLE: DIAL NUMBER

1 Press the talk switch.
2 Say the phone number.
 In the same manner as it is displayed on the
screen, “Dial ”, after saying “Dial
a number” say the phone number.
 Say the phone number one digit at a time.
For example, if the phone number is
2345678:
Say “two three four five six seven eight”

3 Say “Call” or press the

switch on the

steering wheel.

 When the confirmation screen appears,
say “Yes” or select “Yes” or press the
switch on the steering wheel.
 When the system recognizes multiple
phone numbers, a phone number candidate list will be displayed on the screen.
Pressing the
switch on the steering
wheel makes a call to the top entry on the
list. If the desired phone number is not
displayed on the top of the screen, say
the number of the desired phone number
from the candidate list to select a phone
number from the candidate list.

304

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

2. CASUAL SPEECH RECOGNIZATION
Due to natural language speech recognition technology, this system enables
recognition of a command when spoken
naturally. However, the system cannot
recognize every variation of each command. In some situations, it is possible to
omit the command for the procedure
and directly state the desired operation.
Not all voice commands are displayed in
the short cut menu.
INFORMATION

Command

Expression examples

“Go Home”

Navigate to my house.
Take me home.

“Enter an
Address”

I need a route to a street
address.
Give me a street.

“Find
”

Search for a around here.
I need a route to a nearby .

“Call
”

Get
me
.
Contact the phone of
.

“Dial ”

Can you get me
<3334445555>.
Ring <3334445555>.

“Play Artist
”

Play the artist .
I want to hear the band
.

“Play Album
”

Switch to the album
.

305

LS460_600h_Navi_U

5
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

●If the command cannot be recognized
completely, the command input screen
will be displayed. (Search results will be
shown based on the part of the command
that was recognized.)

EXPRESSION EXAMPLES FOR
EACH FUNCTION

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

3. COMMAND LIST
Recognizable voice commands and their actions are shown below.
 Frequently used commands are listed in the following tables.
 For devices that are not installed in the vehicle, the related commands will not be displayed in the screen. Also, according to conditions, other commands may not be displayed in the screen.
 The functions available may vary according to the system installed.
 Voice recognition language can be changed. (P. 56)

Basic
Command

Action

“Help”

Prompts voice guidance to offer examples of commands
or operation methods

“Go Back”

Returns to the previous screen

“Go to ”

Displays the command list of the selected tab

“More Hints”

Displays more commonly used commands

“Cancel”

Cancels the voice command system

Apps*
When the voice recognition language is set to English.
Command
“Launch ”
*: With navigation function

306

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Action
Activates the LEXUS App Suite application

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

Navi*1
Command

Action

“Find ”

Displays a list of near the current position*3

“Enter an Address”

Enables setting a destination by saying the address

“Go Home”

Displays the route to home

“Pause Guidance”

Stops the route guidance

“Resume Guidance”

Resumes the route guidance

“Show icons”

Displays the specified POI icons

“Delete Destination”

Deletes the destination

“Previous Destination”

Displays previous destinations

Phone
Command

Action

“Redial”

Places a call to the phone number of the latest outgoing
call

“Call Back”

Places a call to the phone number of latest incoming call

“Show Recent Calls”

Displays the call history screen

“Dial ”

Places a call to the said phone number

“Call ”

Place a call to the said phone type of the contact from the
phone book

307

LS460_600h_Navi_U

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

*1: With navigation function
*2: For example; “Gas stations”, “Restaurants”, etc.
*3: Depending on the search results, a POI list may be provided by a relevant POI application of
the LEXUS App suite. (P. 394)

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

Radio
Command

Action

“Tune to AM”

Changes the radio to the specified AM frequency

“Tune to FM”

Changes the radio to the specified FM frequency

“Play station”

Changes the radio to an FM station of the specified genre

“Tune to FM
HD ”

Changes the radio to the specified HD radio station

“Tune to preset ”

Changes the radio to the specified preset radio station

“Tune to ”

Changes the radio to the satellite radio channel with the
specified name

“Tune to channel ”

Changes the radio to the specified satellite radio channel
number

“Play satellite station”

Changes the radio to a satellite radio channel of the specified genre

“AM Radio”

Selects AM radio mode

“FM Radio”

Selects FM radio mode

“Sirius XM”

Selects satellite radio mode

308

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

Audio
Command

Action
Plays tracks from the selected playlist

“Play Artist ”

Plays tracks from the selected artist

“Play Song ”

Plays the selected track

“Play Album ”

Plays tracks from the selected album

“Turn Music On”

Turns the audio system on

“Turn Music Off”

Turns the audio system off

“Disc”

Selects the selected disc mode

“USB”

Selects USB audio mode

“iPod”

Selects iPod audio mode

“Bluetooth* Audio”

Selects Bluetooth® audio mode

“External”

Selects VTR mode

“Auxiliary”

Selects AUX audio mode

5
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

“Play Playlist ”

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Info*
Command

Action

“Destination Assist”

Connects the system to the Lexus response center

“Show Forecast”

Displays weather information

“Show Traffic”

Displays traffic information

“Lexus Insider”

Displays the Lexus insider list

*: With navigation function

309

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION

Climate
Command

Action

“Turn Climate Control On”

Turns air conditioning system on

“Turn Climate Control Off”

Turns air conditioning system off

“Warmer”

Increases the temperature of the air conditioning system

“Cooler”

Decreases the temperature of the air conditioning system

“<#> degrees”

Changes the set temperature of the air conditioning system to <#> degrees*

*: Only within the possible temperature range of the air conditioning system
INFORMATION

●Commands relating to operation of the audio/visual and air conditioning systems can only
be performed when the audio and air conditioning systems are turned on.

310

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

1. MOBILE ASSISTANT
The Mobile Assistant feature will
activate Apple’s Siri® Eyes Free mode
via the steering wheel switches. To
operate the Mobile Assistant, a
compatible cellular phone must be
registered and connected to this system
via Bluetooth®. (P.39.)

1 Press and hold this switch until you hear
the beeps.

when the “Mobile Assistant” screen is
displayed.

INFORMATION

●The available features and functions may
vary based on the iOS version installed
on the connected device.
●Some Siri features are limited in Eyes
Free mode. If you attempt to use an
unavailable function, Siri will inform you
that the function is not available.
●If Siri is not enabled on the cellular phone
connected via Bluetooth®, an error message will be displayed on the screen.
●While a phone call is active, the Mobile
Assistant cannot be used.
●If using the navigation feature of the cellular phone, ensure the active audio source
is Bluetooth® audio or iPod in order to
hear turn by turn direction prompts.

 To cancel the Mobile Assistant, select
“Cancel”, or press and hold the
on the
steering wheel.
 To restart the Mobile Assistant for additional commands, press the
on the
steering wheel.
• Mobile Assistant can only be restarted
after the system responds to a voice command.
• After some phone and music commands,
the Mobile Assistant feature will automatically end to complete the requested
action.

311

LS460_600h_Navi_U

5
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM

2 The Mobile Assistant can be used only

 The volume of the Mobile Assistant can
be adjusted using the “PWR·VOL” knob
or steering wheel volume control
switches. The Mobile Assistant and
phone call volumes are synchronized.

2. MOBILE ASSISTANT OPERATION

MICROPHONE
It is not necessary to speak directly into
the microphone when using the Mobile
Assistant.
(Microphone
location:
P.298.)
INFORMATION

●Wait for the listening beeps before using
the Mobile Assistant.
●The Mobile Assistant may not recognize
commands in the following situations:
• Spoken too quickly.
• Spoken at a low or high volume.
• The roof or windows are open.
• Passengers are talking while the Mobile
Assistant is being used.
• The air conditioning speed is set high.
• The air conditioning vents are turned
toward the microphone.

312

LS460_600h_Navi_U

6
1

INFORMATION*
2

INFORMATION DISPLAY

1. RECEIVING DOPPLER
WEATHER INFORMATION............ 314 4
DISPLAYING DOPPLER
WEATHER INFORMATION ......................... 314

2. DATA SERVICES SETTINGS .............. 316

SETTING DOWNLOAD METHODS .......... 316

*: This function is not made available on some models.

313

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

1. RECEIVING DOPPLER WEATHER INFORMATION
Doppler weather radar information can
be received via HD Radio broadcast or
by the LEXUS App Suite application on
a Bluetooth® phone. For details about
the LEXUS App Suite application: P.
387

4 Check that the “Weather” screen is displayed.

DISPLAYING DOPPLER
WEATHER INFORMATION

1 Press the “MENU” button on the

No.

Function
Select to display the weather of the
current location. (P. 315)

Remote Touch.

Select to display the weather of a desired location in the recently
checked locations list.
Select to display the weather of a desired location in the national cities
list.

2 Select “Info”.
3 Select “Weather”.

Select to display the weather of a desired location in the other local cities
list.
*

Select to display Doppler weather
radar information over the map.

*: With navigation function

314

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

DISPLAYING THE WEATHER
OF THE CURRENT LOCATION

1 Display the “Weather” screen. (P.
314)

2 Select “Current Weather”.
3 Select the desired tab to be displayed.
 When the “3 Day” tab is selected: When a
specific day is selected, weather information for that day will be displayed.

6
INFORMATION
315

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. INFORMATION DISPLAY

2. DATA SERVICES SETTINGS
SETTING DOWNLOAD
METHODS
Data service information, which is comprised of traffic information and weather
information, can be received via HD Radio broadcast and by the LEXUS App
Suite application on a Bluetooth®
phone. The receiving method can be set
to both or only via HD Radio broadcast.
For details about the LEXUS App Suite
application: P. 387

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

3 Select “Data Services”.
4 Select the desired item to be set.

 Select a checkbox on the right to set.
No.

Function
Select to receive data service information via both HD Radio broadcast
and the LEXUS App Suite application on a Bluetooth® phone. When
both methods are available, HD Radio broadcast will be selected.
Select to receive data only via HD
Radio broadcast.

2 Select “Setup”.

316

LS460_600h_Navi_U

7
1

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
2

LEXUS PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR

2 INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

1. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST ........... 334
1. LEXUS PARKING
ASSIST MONITOR .............................. 318

TYPES OF SENSORS.......................................... 334

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ................................ 318

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
SWITCH.................................................................. 334

SCREEN DISPLAY ............................................... 320

DISPLAY .................................................................... 335

USING THE SYSTEM............................................ 321

THE DISTANCE DISPLAY AND
BUZZER ................................................................. 336

2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE
DISPLAY MODE ................................. 323
SCREEN DESCRIPTION .................................. 323

DETECTION RANGE OF
THE SENSORS.................................................... 338

PARKING ................................................................... 324

SENSOR DETECTION
INFORMATION................................................. 338

3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE
DISPLAY MODE ................................. 325

INTUITIVE PARKING
ASSIST-SENSOR FAILURE
WARNING............................................................ 340

SCREEN DESCRIPTION .................................. 325

CERTIFICATION................................................... 340

PARKING .................................................................. 326

4. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST
MONITOR PRECAUTIONS .......... 327
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN................. 327
THE CAMERA ........................................................ 328
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN
THE SCREEN AND
THE ACTUAL ROAD...................................... 329

9
2. INTUITIVE PARKING
ASSIST SETTING................................... 341
SETTING AN ALERT VOLUME...................... 341
SETTING A PARKING SONAR
DISPLAY................................................................... 341
SETTING A DISPLAY AND
TONE INDICATION ....................................... 342

WHEN APPROACHING
THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECTS......... 330

5. THINGS YOU SHOULD
KNOW..................................................... 332
IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS ......... 332

317

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
The parking assist monitor assists the
driver by displaying an image of the view
behind the vehicle while backing up, for
example while parking.
INFORMATION

●The screen illustrations used in this text
are intended as examples, and may differ
from the image that is actually displayed
on the screen.

DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
The parking assist monitor is a supplemental device intended to assist the
driver when backing up. When backing
up, be sure to visually check all around
the vehicle both directly and using the
mirrors before proceeding. If you do
not, you may hit another vehicle, and
could possibly cause an accident.
Pay attention to the following precautions when using the parking assist monitor.

318

LS460_600h_Navi_U

CAUTION
●Never depend on the parking assist monitor entirely when backing up. The image
and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ from the
actual state.
Use caution, just as you would when
backing up any vehicle.
●Be sure to back up slowly, depressing the
brake pedal to control vehicle speed.
●If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles,
obstacles, people or mount the shoulder,
depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle.
●The instructions given are only guidelines.
When and how much to turn the steering
wheel will vary according to traffic conditions, road surface conditions, vehicle
condition, etc. when parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using
the parking assist system.
●When parking, be sure to check that the
parking space will accommodate your
vehicle before maneuvering into it.

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

CAUTION
●Do not use the parking assist monitor system in the following cases:
• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow
• When using tire chains or emergency
tires
• When the trunk is not closed completely
• On roads that are not flat or straight,
such as curves or slopes
●In low temperatures, the screen may
darken or the image may become faint.
The image could distort when the vehicle
is moving, or you may become unable to
see the image on the screen. Be sure to
visually check all around the vehicle both
directly and using the mirrors before proceeding.
●If the tire sizes are changed, the position
of the guide lines displayed on the screen
may change.
●The camera uses a special lens. The distances between objects and pedestrians
that appear in the image displayed on the
screen will differ from the actual distances. (P. 329)

7
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
319

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

SCREEN DISPLAY
The parking assist monitor screen will be displayed if the shift lever is shifted to the “R”
position while the engine switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

CANCELING LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR
The parking assist monitor is canceled when the shift lever is shifted into any position
other than the “R” position.

320

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

USING THE SYSTEM

Parking assist guide line display mode
(P. 325)

Use any of the following modes.

The steering wheel return points (parking assist guide lines) are displayed.

Distance guide line display mode
Estimated course line display mode
(P. 323)

Distance guide lines only are displayed.

Estimated course lines are displayed
which move in accordance with the operation of the steering wheel.

7
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
321

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

SWITCHING THE DISPLAY
MODE

5 Select the display mode.

When the shift lever is in any position
other than the “R” position, the display
mode can be changed in the following
procedure.

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “Vehicle”.
4 Select “Backup Camera Guide Line
Settings”.

322

LS460_600h_Navi_U

No.

Name

Page/Detail

Estimated course
line display mode

323

Parking
assist
guide line display
mode

325

Distance guide
line display mode

Distance guide
lines only are
displayed.

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

2. ESTIMATED COURSE LINE DISPLAY MODE
SCREEN DESCRIPTION

No.

Display

Vehicle width guide line

Function
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed
straight up.
 The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle
width.
 These guide lines align with the estimated course lines
when the vehicle is going straight ahead.
Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is
turned.

Distance guide lines

Shows distance behind the vehicle when the steering
wheel is turned.
 The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated
course lines.
 The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5
m) (red) and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the
center of the edge of the bumper.

Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.
 Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue)
from the edge of the bumper.

Vehicle center guide line

The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the
ground.

CAUTION
●If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the estimated course
lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

323

LS460_600h_Navi_U

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

Estimated course lines

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

PARKING

3 When the rear position of the vehicle
has entered the parking space, turn the
steering wheel so that the vehicle width
guide lines are within the left and right
dividing lines of the parking space.

When parking in a space which is in the
reverse direction to the space described
in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.

1 Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.
2 Turn the steering wheel so that the esti-

mated course lines are within the parking space, and back up slowly.



Vehicle width guide line

4 Once the vehicle width guide lines and
the parking space lines are parallel,
straighten the steering wheel and back
up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space.



Parking space
Estimated course lines

324

LS460_600h_Navi_U

5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place,
and finish parking.

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

3. PARKING ASSIST GUIDE LINE DISPLAY MODE
SCREEN DESCRIPTION

No.

Display

Function

Parking assist guide lines

Shows the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehicle.
 Shows the approximate position of the steering wheel
when parking.

Distance guide line

Shows distance behind the vehicle.
 Display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from
the edge of the bumper.

Vehicle center guide line

The line indicates the estimated vehicle center on the
ground.

325

LS460_600h_Navi_U

7
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

Vehicle width guide line

Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed
straight up.
 The displayed width is wider than the actual vehicle
width.

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

PARKING

3 Turn the steering wheel all the way to

When parking in a space which is in the
reverse direction to the space described
in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.

4 Once the vehicle is parallel with the

1 Shift the shift lever to the “R” position.
2 Back up until the parking assist guide

line meets the edge of the left-hand dividing line of the parking space.



Parking assist guide line
Parking space dividing line

326

LS460_600h_Navi_U

the right, and back up slowly.

parking space, straighten the steering
wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking
space.

5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place,
and finish parking.

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

4. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR PRECAUTIONS
AREA DISPLAYED ON
SCREEN
The parking assist monitor displays an
image of the view from the bumper of
the rear area of the vehicle.
Displayed area

INFORMATION

●The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to vehicle orientation
conditions.
●Objects which are close to either corner
of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be displayed.
●The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the
screen differs from the actual distance.
●Items which are located higher than the
camera may not be displayed on the
monitor.

Screen

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

Corners of bumper

 The image adjustment procedure for the
parking assist monitor screen is the same as
the procedure for adjusting the screen.
(P. 37)

327

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

THE CAMERA
The camera for the parking assist monitor is located as shown in the illustration.

USING THE CAMERA
If dirt or foreign matter (such as water
droplets, snow, mud etc.) is adhering to
the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a large
quantity of water and wipe the camera
lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.

328

LS460_600h_Navi_U

NOTICE
●The parking assist monitor may not operate properly in the following cases.
• If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and mounting angle of the camera
may change.
• As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble or
modify it. This may cause incorrect
operation.
• When cleaning the camera lens, flush
the camera with a large quantity of
water and wipe it with a soft and wet
cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera lens
may cause the camera lens to be
scratched and unable to transmit a clear
image.
• Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,
window cleaner or a glass coating to
adhere to the camera. If this happens,
wipe it off as soon as possible.
• If the temperature changes rapidly, such
as when hot water is poured on the
vehicle in cold weather, the system may
not operate normally.
• When washing the vehicle, do not apply
intensive bursts of water to the camera
or camera area. Doing so may result in
the camera malfunctioning.
●Do not expose the camera to strong
impact as this could cause a malfunction.
If this happens, have the vehicle
inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE
SCREEN AND THE ACTUAL
ROAD
 The distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking
space, even when they appear to be so. Be
sure to check visually.
 The distances between the vehicle width
guide lines and the left and right dividing
lines of the parking space may not be equal,
even when they appear to be so. Be sure to
check visually.
 The distance guide lines give a distance
guide for flat road surfaces. In any of the
following situations, there is a margin of
error between the guide lines on the screen
and the actual distance/course on the road.

WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES UP
SHARPLY
The distance guide lines will appear to
be closer to the vehicle than the actual
distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a
margin of error between the guide lines
and the actual distance/course on the
road.

7
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
329

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

WHEN THE GROUND BEHIND
THE VEHICLE SLOPES DOWN
SHARPLY
The distance guide lines will appear to
be farther from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects
will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a
margin of error between the guide lines
and the actual distance/course on the
road.

WHEN ANY PART OF THE
VEHICLE SAGS
When any part of the vehicle sags due to
the number of passengers or the distribution of the load, there is a margin of error between the guide lines on the
screen and the actual distance/course
on the road.

A margin of error

WHEN APPROACHING
THREE-DIMENSIONAL
OBJECTS
The estimated course lines target flat
surfaced objects (such as the road). It is
not possible to determine the position of
three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the estimated course lines
and distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object
that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.

330

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

ESTIMATED COURSE LINES
Visually check the surroundings and the
area behind the vehicle. In the case
shown below, the truck appears to be
outside of the estimated course lines and
the vehicle does not look as if it hits the
truck. However, the rear body of the
truck may actually cross over the estimated course lines. In reality if you back
up as guided by the estimated course
lines, the vehicle may hit the truck.

DISTANCE GUIDE LINES
Visually check the surroundings and the
area behind the vehicle. On the screen,
it appears that a truck is parking at point
B. However, in reality if you back up to
point A, you will hit the truck. On the
screen, it appears that A is closest and C
is farthest away. However, in reality, the
distance to A and C is the same, and B is
farther than A and C.
Positions of A, B and C

C
7



Estimated course lines

331

LS460_600h_Navi_U

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

C
B
A

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

5. THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW
IF YOU NOTICE ANY SYMPTOMS
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solution,
and re-check.
If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus
dealer.
Symptom

Likely cause

Solution

The image is difficult to see

 The vehicle is in a dark area
 The temperature around
the lens is either high or low
 The outside temperature is
low
 There are water droplets on
the camera
 It is raining or humid
 Foreign matter (mud etc.) is
adhering to the camera
 Sunlight or headlights are
shining directly into the
camera
 The vehicle is under fluorescent lights, sodium lights,
mercury lights etc.

Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings.
(Use the monitor again once
conditions have been improved.)
The procedure for adjusting
the picture quality of the parking assist monitor is the same
as the procedure for adjusting
the screen. (P. 37)

The image is blurry

Dirt or foreign matter (such as
water droplets, snow, mud
etc.) is adhering to the camera.

Flush the camera with a large
quantity of water and wipe the
camera lens clean with a soft
and wet cloth.

The image is out of alignment

The camera or surrounding
area has received a strong impact.

Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.

The guide lines are very far
out of alignment

The camera position is out of
alignment.

Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.

 The vehicle is tilted. (There
is a heavy load on the vehicle, tire pressure is low due
to a tire puncture, etc.)
 The vehicle is used on an
incline.

If this happens due to these
causes, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
Back up while visually checking the vehicle’s surroundings.

There is a malfunction in the
signals being output by the
steering sensor.

Have the vehicle inspected by
your Lexus dealer.

The estimated course lines
move even though the steering wheel is straight

332

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS PARKING ASSIST MONITOR

Symptom

Likely cause

Solution

Guide lines are not displayed

The trunk is open.

Close the trunk.
If this does not resolve the
symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

The estimated course lines
are not displayed

 12-volt battery has been
reinstalled.
 The steering wheel has
been moved while the 12volt battery was being reinstalled.
 12-volt battery power is low.
 The steering sensor has
been reinstalled.
 There is a malfunction in the
signals being output by the
steering sensor.

Stop the vehicle, and turn the
steering wheel as far as it will
go to the left and right.
If this does not resolve the
symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.

7
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
333

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

1. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
The distance to obstacles measured by
the sensors is communicated via the display and a buzzer when parallel parking
or maneuvering into a garage. Always
check the surrounding area when using
this system.

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST
SWITCH

1 Turn the intuitive parking assist on/off.

TYPES OF SENSORS

 When on, the indicator light comes on to
inform the driver that the system is operational.

Front side sensors
Front corner sensors
Front center sensors
Rear corner sensors
Rear center sensors

334

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

DISPLAY

■ SCREEN DISPLAY

When the sensors detect an obstacle,
the graphic is shown on the multi-information display and screen display according to position and distance to the
obstacle.
■ MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAY

: Select to mute the buzzer sounds.
This function is available when the vehicle is
moving forward.
 The graphic is automatically displayed
when an obstacle is detected. The screen
can be set so that the graphic is not displayed. (P. 341)

7
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

Front side and front corner sensors operation
Front center sensors operation
Rear corner sensors operation
Rear center sensors operation

335

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

THE DISTANCE DISPLAY AND BUZZER
When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to
the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds.
■ CORNER SENSORS AND SIDE SENSORS
Level

Display example



Buzzer



Medium

Fast

Continuous

Slow

Medium

Fast

Continuous

■ CENTER SENSORS
Level
Display example
Buzzer

336

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

■ DETECTION LEVEL AND APPROXIMATE DISTANCE TO AN OBSTACLE
Level

Front side sensors



1.6 to 1.2 ft.
(50 to 37.5 cm)

1.2 to 1.0 ft.
(37.5 to 30 cm)

1.0 ft. (30 cm)
or less

Front corner
sensors



2.0 to 1.2 ft.
(60 to 37.5 cm)

1.2 to 1.0 ft.
(37.5 to 30 cm)

1.0 ft. (30 cm)
or less

Front center
sensors

3.3 to 1.6 ft.
(100 to 50 cm)

1.6 to 1.2 ft.
(50 to 37.5 cm)

1.2 to 1.0 ft.
(37.5 to 30 cm)

1.0 ft. (30 cm)
or less

Rear corner
sensors



2.0 to 1.2 ft.
(60 to 37.5 cm)

1.2 to 0.8 ft.
(37.5 to 25 cm)

0.8 ft. (25 cm)
or less

Rear center
sensors

4.9 to 2.0 ft.
(150 to 60 cm)

2.0 to 1.5 ft.
(60 to 45 cm)

1.5 to 1.1 ft.
(45 to 35 cm)

1.1 ft. (35 cm)
or less

INFORMATION

●Settings (e.g. buzzer volume) can be changed. (P. 341)

PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM
337

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

DETECTION RANGE OF THE
SENSORS

SENSOR DETECTION
INFORMATION
Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect the
ability of a sensor to correctly detect an
obstacle. Particular instances where this
may occur are listed below.

Approximately 1.6 ft. (50 cm)
Approximately 2.0 ft. (60 cm)
Approximately 3.3 ft. (100 cm)
Approximately 4.9 ft. (150 cm)
 The diagram shows the detection range of
the sensors. Note that the sensors cannot
detect obstacles that are extremely close to
the vehicle.
 The range of the sensors may change
depending on the shape of the object etc.

338

LS460_600h_Navi_U

 There is dirt, snow or ice on a sensor.
 A sensor is frozen.
 A sensor is covered in any way.
 The vehicle is leaning considerably to one
side.
 On an extremely bumpy road, on an
incline, on gravel, or on grass
 The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to
vehicle horns, motorcycle engines, air
brakes of large vehicles, or other loud
noises producing ultrasonic waves.
 There is another vehicle equipped with
parking assist-sensors in the vicinity.
 A sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or
heavy rain.
 The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole
or radio antenna.
 Towing eyelets are installed.
 A bumper or sensor receives a strong
impact.

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

 The vehicle is approaching a tall or rightangled curb.
 In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather.
 A non-genuine Lexus suspension (lowered
suspension etc.) is installed.
 In addition to the examples above, there
are instances in which, because of their
shapes, signs and other objects may be
judged by a sensor to be closer than they
are.

●Caution when using the intuitive parking
assist-sensor
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle
being unable to be driven safely and possibly cause an accident.
• Do not use the sensor at speeds in
excess of 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Do not attach any accessories within
the sensor range.
●Even though sensors which are functioning properly continue to detect obstacles,
never use the intuitive parking assist if
one more sensor(s) may be malfunctioning.

7
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

 The shape of the obstacle may prevent a
sensor from detecting it. Pay particular
attention to the following obstacles:
• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.
• Cotton, snow and other materials that
absorb sound waves
• Sharply-angled objects
• Low obstacles
• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction of your vehicle

CAUTION

339

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

NOTICE
●Notes when washing the vehicle
• Do not apply intensive bursts of water
or steam to the sensor area. Doing so
may result in the sensor malfunctioning.
●As the intuitive parking assist-sensor
might be malfunctioning in the following
cases, have it checked by your Lexus
dealer.
• The graphic which indicates that an
obstacle has been detected does not
come on and a beep does not sound
even when the intuitive parking assist
mode is turned on.
• The graphic which indicates that an
obstacle has been detected comes on
despite no obstacle around the vehicle.
• If your vehicle has been involved in an
accident.
• If the graphic which indicates that an
obstacles has been detected remains
on without a beeping sound.

INTUITIVE PARKING ASSISTSENSOR FAILURE WARNING
If an error is detected when the intuitive
parking assist-sensor is turned on, the
vehicle symbol comes on or flashes with
beeping sounds.

340

LS460_600h_Navi_U

INFORMATION

●The intuitive parking assist-sensor failure
warning display is not given in either of
the following operations:
• Changing to another screen
• Turning off the main switch for the intuitive parking assist-sensor

IF THE FAILURE WARNING
APPEARS
:This symbol indicates that a sensor is
covered with foreign matter such as snow
or mud. Remove the foreign matter from
the sensor.
If the failure warning does not go off even
after the foreign matter is removed, the intuitive parking assist-sensor may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle inspected
by your Lexus dealer.
:This symbol indicates that the intuitive
parking assist-sensor is malfunctioning.
Have your vehicle inspected by your
Lexus dealer.

CERTIFICATION
For vehicles sold in Canada.
 This ISM device complies with Canadian
ICES-001.
 Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la
norme NMB-001 du Canada.

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST SETTING
The volume of the beeps, turning on or
off of the display, etc. can be set.

SETTING AN ALERT VOLUME

1 Press the “MENU” button on the

The alert volume can be adjusted.

Remote Touch.

1 Display the “LEXUS Park Assist Settings” screen. (P. 341)

2 Select the desired screen button.

2
3
4
5

Select “Setup”.
Select “Vehicle”.
Select “LEXUS Park Assist”.
Select the desired button.

 The volume has 5 levels, increasing with
higher value.

Parking sonar display can be set to on or
off.

1 Display the “LEXUS Park Assist Settings” screen. (P. 341)

2 Select “Display Off” to turn off the
parking sonar display.

341

LS460_600h_Navi_U

7
PERIPHERAL MONITORING SYSTEM

SETTING A PARKING SONAR
DISPLAY

2. INTUITIVE PARKING ASSIST

SETTING A DISPLAY AND
TONE INDICATION
Front and back sensors display and tone
indication can be set.

1 Display the “LEXUS Park Assist Settings” screen. (P. 341)

2 Select “Front” or “Rear”.
 Selecting “Front” or “Rear” to switch the
distance for the front or back sensors display and tone indication, from long distance
to short distance, or from short distance to
long distance.

342

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8
1

PHONE
2

PHONE OPERATION (HANDSFREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR
PHONES)

1. QUICK REFERENCE ........................... 344
2. SOME BASICS ........................................ 345
REGISTERING/CONNECTING
A Bluetooth® PHONE..................................... 346
USING THE PHONE
SWITCH/MICROPHONE ........................... 346

5. TALKING ON THE
Bluetooth® PHONE............................ 356 3
INCOMING CALL WAITING....................... 358

4
6. Bluetooth® PHONE
MESSAGE FUNCTION.................... 359
RECEIVING A MESSAGE ............................... 360
CHECKING MESSAGES................................... 361
REPLYING TO A MESSAGE
(QUICK REPLY)................................................. 362
CALLING THE MESSAGE SENDER ......... 363

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM....................... 347
ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN
THE CONTACT LIST....................................... 348

2 SETUP

WHEN SELLING OR DISPOSING
OF THE VEHICLE ............................................. 348

1. PHONE SETTINGS................................ 364

3. CALLING ON THE
Bluetooth® PHONE............................ 349

“Contacts/Call History” SCREEN .................. 366

BY FAVORITES LIST ........................................... 350

“Notifications” SCREEN ....................................... 374

“Sounds” SCREEN ................................................. 365
“Messaging” SCREEN........................................... 373

BY CALL HISTORY ............................................. 350
BY CONTACTS LIST ............................................ 351
BY DIAL PAD .......................................................... 353
BY OFF HOOK SWITCH ................................. 354

3 WHAT TO DO IF...
1. TROUBLESHOOTING ........................ 375

4. RECEIVING ON THE
Bluetooth® PHONE............................ 355
INCOMING CALLS............................................ 355

343

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

1. QUICK REFERENCE
The phone top screen can be reached by the following methods:
Using the steering wheel.
Press the switch on the steering wheel.
From the “Menu” screen
Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Phone”.

Function

Phone operation

Page

Registering/connecting Bluetooth® device

Calling on the Bluetooth® phone

349

Receiving on the Bluetooth® phone

355

Message function
Setting up a phone

344

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Talking on the Bluetooth phone

356

Using the Bluetooth® phone message function

359

Phone settings

364

Bluetooth settings

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

2. SOME BASICS
The hands-free system enables calls to
be made and received without having to
take your hands off the steering wheel.
Bluetooth®.

This system supports
Bluetooth® is a wireless data system
that enables cellular phones to be used
without being connected by a cable or
placed in a cradle.
The operating procedure of the phone is
explained here.
CAUTION

●Do not leave your cellular phone in the
vehicle. The temperature inside may rise
to a level that could damage the phone.
INFORMATION

●If your cellular phone does not support
Bluetooth®, this system cannot function.
●In the following conditions, the system
may not function:
• The cellular phone is turned off.
• The current position is outside the communication area.
• The cellular phone is not connected.
• The cellular phone has a low battery.
●When using Bluetooth® audio and
hands-free system at the same time, the
following problems may occur:
• The Bluetooth® connection may be cut.
• Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth®
audio playback.

345

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8
PHONE

●While driving, do not use a cellular phone
or connect the Bluetooth® phone.
●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®
antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable
cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between
themselves and the Bluetooth® antennas.
The radio waves may affect the operation
of such devices.
●Before using Bluetooth® devices, users
of any electrical medical device other
than implantable cardiac pacemakers,
cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter
defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about
its operation under the influence of radio
waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.

NOTICE

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

REGISTERING/
CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
PHONE
To use the hands-free system for cellular
phones, it is necessary to register a cellular phone with the system. (P. 39)

USING THE PHONE SWITCH/
MICROPHONE
Steering switch

By pressing the phone switch, a call can
be received or ended without taking
your hands off the steering wheel.

Bluetooth® PHONE
CONDITION DISPLAY
The condition of the Bluetooth® phone
appears on the upper right side of the
screen. (P. 16)

Volume control switch
 Press the “+” side to increase the volume.
 Press the “-” side to decrease the volume.
Off hook switch
On hook switch

346

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

Microphone

The microphone is used when talking on
the phone.

VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
Press this switch to operate the voice
command system.

INFORMATION

 The voice command system and its list of
commands can be operated. (P. 298)

347

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8
PHONE

●The other party’s voice will be heard from
the front speakers. The audio/visual system will be muted during phone calls or
when hands-free voice commands are
used.
●Talk alternately with the other party on
the phone. If both parties speak at the
same time, the other party may not hear
what has been said. (This is not a malfunction.)
●Keep call volume down. Otherwise, the
other party’s voice may be audible outside the vehicle and voice echo may
increase. When talking on the phone,
speak clearly towards the microphone.
●The other party may not hear you clearly
when:
• Driving on an unpaved road. (Making
excessive traffic noise.)
• Driving at high speeds.
• The roof or windows are open.
• The air conditioning vents are pointed
towards the microphone.
• The sound of the air conditioning fan is
loud.
• There is a negative effect on sound
quality due to the phone and/or network
being used.

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

ABOUT THE CONTACTS IN
THE CONTACT LIST
 The following data is stored for every registered phone. When another phone is connected, the following registered data
cannot be read:
• Contact data
• Call history data
• Favorites data
• Image data
• All phone settings
• Message settings
INFORMATION

●When a phone’s registration is deleted,
the above-mentioned data is also
deleted.

WHEN SELLING OR
DISPOSING OF THE VEHICLE
A lot of personal data is registered when
the hands-free system is used. When
selling or disposing of the vehicle, initialize the data. (P. 61)
 The following data in the system can be initialized:
• Contact data
• Call history data
• Favorites data
• Image data
• All phone settings
• Message settings
INFORMATION

●Once initialized, the data and settings will
be erased. Pay much attention when initializing the data.

348

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

3. CALLING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
After a Bluetooth® phone has been registered, a call can be made using the
hands-free system. There are several
methods by which a call can be made, as
described below.

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

2 Select “Phone”.

3 Select the desired tab to call from.
 The phone top screen can be displayed by
pressing the
switch on the steering
wheel.
How to make a call list

Page

By favorites list

350

By call history

350

By contacts list*1

351

By dial pad*1

353

By e-mail/SMS/MMS

363

By POI call

By off hook switch

354

By LEXUS App Suite*2

399

By voice command system

303

By quick dial

414

: The operation cannot be performed while
driving.
*2: With navigation function

349

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8
PHONE

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

BY FAVORITES LIST

BY CALL HISTORY

Calls can be made using registered contacts which can be selected from a contact list. (P. 371)

Up to 30 of the latest call history items
(missed, incoming and outgoing) can be
selected from the “Call History” tab.

1 Display the phone top screen.

2 Select the “Favorites” tab and select the

2 Select the “Call History” tab and select

3 Select the desired number.
4 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-

 The icons of call type are displayed.

(P. 349)

desired contact.

played.

(P. 349)

or the desired contact.
: Missed call
: Incoming call
: Outgoing call
When

is selected

3 Check that the “Call” screen is dis-

played.
When the desired contact is selected

3 Select the desired number.
4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

350

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

INFORMATION

●When making a call to the same number
continuously, only the most recent call is
listed in call history.
●When a phone number registered in the
contact list is received, the name is displayed.
●Number-withheld calls are also memorized in the system.
●International phone calls may not be
made depending on the type of cellular
phone you have.
●The list should group together consecutive entries with the same phone number
and same call type. For example, two calls
from John’s mobile would be displayed as
follows: John (2)
●By pressing the
switch on the steering
wheel, a call to the latest history item can
be made.

BY CONTACTS LIST
Calls can be made by using contact data
which is transferred from a registered
cellular phone. (P. 352)
Up to 2500 contacts (maximum of 4
phone numbers and e-mail addresses
per contact) can be registered in the
contact list.

1 Display the phone top screen.
(P. 349)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab and select the
desired contact.

3 Select the desired number.
4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

8
PHONE
351

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

WHEN THE CONTACT IS
EMPTY
■ FOR
PBAP
COMPATIBLE
®
Bluetooth PHONES
When “Automatic Transfer” is set to on
(P. 366)

■ FOR PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUT
OPP COMPATIBLE Bluetooth®
PHONES

1 Select the desired item.

 Contacts are transferred automatically.

When “Automatic Transfer” is set to off
(P. 366)

1 Select the desired item.
No.

Function
Select to transfer the contacts from
the connected cellular phone.
Select to add a new contact manually.
Select to cancel transferring.

No.

Function
Select to always transfer all the contacts from a connected cellular
phone automatically.
Select to transfer all the contacts
from a connected cellular phone
only once.
Select to cancel transferring.

2 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

352

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

When “Transfer” is selected

2 Follow the steps in “When the contact
is not registered” from “STEP 2”.
(P. 368)
When “Add” is selected

2 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A
NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACTS LIST” from “STEP 2”.
(P. 370)

INFORMATION

●If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor
OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be
transferred.
●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone:
• It may be necessary to perform additional steps on the phone when transferring contact data.
• The registered image in the contact list
may not transfer depending on the type
of Bluetooth® phone connected.

BY DIAL PAD

1 Display the phone top screen.
(P. 349)

2 Select the “Dial Pad” tab and enter the
phone number.

3 Select

or press the
the steering wheel.

switch on

4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the
phone.

8
PHONE
353

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

BY OFF HOOK SWITCH
Calls can be made using the latest call
history item.

1 Press the

switch on the steering
wheel to display the phone top screen.

2 Press the

switch on the steering
wheel to display the “Call History”
screen.

3 Press the

switch on the steering
wheel to call the latest history item.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

354

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

4. RECEIVING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
INCOMING CALLS
When a call is received, this screen is
displayed with a sound.
This screen can also be displayed on the
“Side Display”. (P. 411)

1 Select

or press the
switch on
the steering wheel to talk on the phone.

INFORMATION

●During international phone calls, the
other party’s name or number may not be
displayed correctly depending on the
type of cellular phone you have.
●The ringtone that has been set in the
“Sounds” screen sounds when there is an
incoming call. Depending on the type of
Bluetooth® phone, both the system and
Bluetooth®
phone
may
sound
simultaneously when there is an incoming
call. (P. 365)
●The incoming call display mode can be
set. (P. 374)

To refuse to receive the call: Select
or press the
switch on the steering
wheel.
To adjust the volume of a received call:
Turn the “PWR·VOL” knob, or use the volume control switch on the steering wheel.

8
PHONE
355

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

5. TALKING ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
While talking on the phone, this screen is
displayed. The operations outlined below can be performed on this screen.
This screen can also be displayed on the
“Side Display”. (P. 411)

No.

Function

Page

Select to display the dial
pad to send tones.

357

Select to mute your voice to
the other party.



Select to change handset
modes between hands-free
and cellular phone.



Select to adjust your voice
volume that the other party
hears from their speaker.

358

Select to send tones. This
button only appears when a
number that contains a (w)
is dialed in hands-free
mode.

357

Select to hang up the
phone.



Select “+” or “-” to adjust
the volume of the other party’s voice.



Select to start talking with
the other party.

358

356

LS460_600h_Navi_U

INFORMATION

●When cellular phone call is changed to
hands-free call, the hands-free screen will
be displayed and its functions can be
operated on the screen.
●Changing between cellular phone call
and hands-free call can be performed by
operating the cellular phone directly.
●Transferring methods and operations will
be different depending on the type of cellular phone you have.
●For the operation of the cellular phone,
see the manual that comes with it.
●This screen can be displayed on the
“Main Display” or “Side Display”. (P.
374)

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

SENDING TONES
■ BY DIAL PAD
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.

1 Select “0-9”.
2 Enter the desired number.
■ BY SELECTING “Release Tones”
“Release Tones” appear when a continuous tone signal(s) containing a (w) is
registered in the contact list.

1 Select “Release Tones”.

INFORMATION

●A continuous tone signal is a character
string that consists of numbers and the
characters
p
or
w.
(e.g.
056133w0123p#1)
●When the “p” pause tone is used, the tone
data up until the next pause tone will be
automatically sent after 2 seconds have
elapsed. When the “w” pause tone is
used, the tone data up until the next
pause tone will be automatically sent
after a user operation is performed.
●Release tones can be used when automated operation of a phone based service such as an answering machine or
bank phone service is desired. A phone
number with continuous tone signals can
be registered in the contact list.
●Tone data after a “w” pause tone can be
operated on voice command during a
call.
8
PHONE
357

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

TRANSMIT VOLUME SETTING

1 Select “Transmit Volume”.
2 Select the desired level for the transmit

volume.
“Default”: Select to reset the transmit volume.

3 Select “OK”.
INFORMATION

●The sound quality of the voice heard from
the other party’s speaker may be negatively impacted.
●“Transmit Volume” is dimmed when mute
is on.

INCOMING CALL WAITING
When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, the incoming screen is
displayed.
The incoming screen can also be displayed on the “Side Display”. (P. 411)

1 Select

or press the
switch on
the steering wheel to start talking with
the other party.

To refuse to receive the call: Select
or press the
switch on the steering
wheel.
 Each time
is selected or the
switch on the steering wheel is pressed
during an interrupted call, the party who is
on hold will be switched.
INFORMATION

●This function may not be available
depending on the type of cellular phone.
●This screen can be displayed on the
“Main Display” or “Side Display”.
(P. 374)

358

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

6. Bluetooth® PHONE MESSAGE FUNCTION
Received messages can be forwarded
from the connected Bluetooth® phone,
enabling checking and replying using
the system.

3 Select

Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone connected, received messages
may not be transferred to the message
inbox.
If the phone does not support the message function, this function cannot be
used.

4 Check that the message inbox screen is

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

 The phone top screen can be displayed by
pressing the
switch on the steering
wheel.

displayed.

: Select to change to phone mode.
Function

Page

Receiving a message

360

Checking messages

361

Replying to a message (quick reply)

362

Calling the message sender

363

Message settings

373

8
PHONE

2 Select “Phone”.

359

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

RECEIVING A MESSAGE
When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is received, the incoming message screen
pops up with sound and is ready to be
operated on the screen.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the cellular phone used for
receiving messages, or its registration
status with the system, some information
may not be displayed.
●The pop up screen is separately available
for incoming e-mail and SMS/MMS messages under the following conditions:

E-mail:
• “E-mail Notification Popup” is set to on.
(P. 374)
SMS/MMS:
• “SMS/MMS Notification Popup” is set
to on. (P. 374)
No.

Function
Select to check the message.
Select to not open the message.
Select to call the message sender.

360

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CHECKING MESSAGES

1 Display the message inbox screen.
(P. 359)

2 Select the desired message from the list.
3 Check that the message is displayed.

No.

Function
Select “Mark Unread” or “Mark
Read” to mark e-mail unread or read
on the message inbox screen.
This function is available when “Update Message Read Status on
Phone” is set to on. (P. 373)

INFORMATION

●Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone being connected, it may be
necessary to perform additional steps on
the phone.
●Messages are displayed in the
appropriate connected Bluetooth®
phone’s registered mail address folder.
Select the tab of the desired folder to be
displayed.
●Only received messages on the
connected Bluetooth® phone can be
displayed.
●The text of the message is not displayed
while driving.
●Turn the “PWR·VOL” knob, or use the
volume control switch on the steering
wheel to adjust the message read out
volume.

8
PHONE

Select to reply the message.
(P. 362)
Select to display the previous or next
message.
Select to have messages read out.
To cancel this function, select “Stop”.
When “Automatic Message Readout” is set to on, messages will be automatically read out. (P. 373)
Select to make a call to the sender.

361

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

REPLYING TO A MESSAGE
(QUICK REPLY)

■ EDITING QUICK REPLY MESSAGES

15 messages have already been stored.

This operation cannot be performed
while driving.

1 Display the message inbox screen.

1 Select “Quick Msg”.

2
3
4
5

2 Select

(P. 359)

Select the desired message from the list.
Select “Quick Msg”.
Select the desired message.

Select “Send”.
“Cancel”: Select to cancel sending the
message.
 While the message is being sent, a sending
message screen is displayed.

6 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

 If an error message is displayed, follow the
guidance on the screen to try again.

corresponding to the desired message to edit.

3 Select “OK” when editing is completed.
INFORMATION

●To reset the edited quick reply messages,
select “Default”.
●“Quick Message 1” (“I am driving and
will arrive in approximately [ETA]
minutes.”)*:
This message cannot be edited and will
automatically fill in [ETA] with the
navigation calculated estimated time of
arrival on the confirm message screen.
If there are waypoints set, [ETA] to the
next waypoint will be shown.
If there is no route currently set in the
navigation system, “Quick Message 1”
cannot be selected.
*: With navigation function

362

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. PHONE OPERATION (HANDS-FREE SYSTEM FOR CELLULAR PHONES)

CALLING THE MESSAGE
SENDER
Calls can be made to an e-mail/SMS/
MMS message sender’s phone number.
This operation can be performed while
driving.
■ CALLING FROM E-MAIL/SMS/
MMS MESSAGE DISPLAY

1 Display the message inbox screen.
(P. 359)

■ CALLING FROM A NUMBER
WITHIN A MESSAGE
Calls can be made to a number identified in a message’s text area.
This operation cannot be performed
while driving.

1 Display the message inbox screen.
(P. 359)

2 Select the desired message.
3 Select the text area.

2 Select the desired message.
3 Select “Call”.
 If there are 2 or more phone numbers,
select the desired number.

4 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

4 Select the desired number.
5 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

INFORMATION

●A series of numbers may be recognized
as a phone number. Additionally, some
phone numbers may not be recognized,
such as those for other countries.

■ CALLING FROM THE INCOMING
MESSAGE SCREEN
P. 360

363

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8
PHONE

 Identified phone numbers contained in the
message are displayed.

2. SETUP

1. PHONE SETTINGS
1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

4 Select the item to be set.

No.

2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “Phone”.

Information

Page

Registering/connecting a
phone

Sound settings

365

Contact/call history settings

366

Message settings

373

Notification settings

374

*: This operation cannot be performed while
driving.

DISPLAYING THE PHONE
SETTINGS SCREEN IN A
DIFFERENT WAY

1 Display the phone top screen.
(P. 349)

2 Select “Settings”.

364

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. SETUP

“Sounds” SCREEN
The call and ringtone volume can be adjusted. A ringtone can be selected.

1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen.
(P. 364)

2 Select “Sounds”.
3 Select the desired item to be set.

No.

Function
Select to set the desired ringtone.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the ringtone volume.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the default
volume of the other party’s voice.
Select to set the desired incoming
SMS/MMS tone.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incoming SMS/MMS tone volume.
Select to set the desired incoming email tone.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the incoming e-mail tone volume.
Select “-” or “+” to adjust the message readout volume.
Select to reset all setup items.

●Depending on the type of phone, certain
functions may not be available.

365

LS460_600h_Navi_U

PHONE

INFORMATION

2. SETUP

“Contacts/Call History”
SCREEN

No.

Function

Page

For PBAP compatible
Bluetooth® phones: Select
to change the contact/history transfer settings.

367

Select to update contacts
from the connected phone.

368

Select to sort contacts by
the first name or last name
field.



Select to add contacts to
the favorites list.

371

Select to delete contacts
from the favorites list.

372

Select to clear contacts
from the call history.



Select to add new contacts
to the contact list.

370

Select to edit contacts in
the contact list.

370

Select to delete contacts
from the contact list.

371

Select to reset all setup
items.



The contact can be transferred from a
Bluetooth® phone to the system. If your
cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP
compatible, the contacts cannot be
transferred.
The contact also can be added, edited
and deleted.
The call history can be deleted and contact and favorites can be changed.

1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen.
(P. 364)

2 Select “Contacts/Call History”.
3 Select the desired item to be set.

*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth®
phones, this function is available when
“Automatic Transfer” is set to off.
(P. 366)

366

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. SETUP

INFORMATION

●Depending on the type of phone, certain
functions may not be available.
●Contact data is managed independently
for every registered phone. When one
phone is connected, another phone’s registered data cannot be read.

SETTING AUTOMATIC
CONTACT/HISTORY
TRANSFER
The automatic contact/history function
is available for PBAP compatible
Bluetooth® phones only.

1 Select “Automatic Transfer”.
2 Select the desired item to be set.

No.

Function

Select to update contacts from the
connected phone. (P. 368)
Select to set the transferred contact
image display on/off.
The contact image cannot be displayed on the “Side Display” when a
call is received.
Select to reset all setup items.

367

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8
PHONE

Select to set automatic contact/history transfer on/off. When set to on,
the phone’s contact data and history
are automatically transferred.

2. SETUP

■ UPDATING CONTACTS FROM
PHONE

1 Select “Update Now”.

When the contact is not registered

 Contacts are transferred automatically.

2 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

 This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of cellular phone.
 Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring contact data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
 If another Bluetooth® device is connected
when transferring contact data, depending
on the phone, the connected Bluetooth®
device may need to be disconnected.
®

 Depending on the type of Bluetooth
phone being connected, it may be necessary to perform additional steps on the
phone.

368

LS460_600h_Navi_U

TRANSFER CONTACTS FROM
PHONE

1 Select

“Transfer

Contacts

from

Phone”.

2 Transfer the contact data to the system
using a Bluetooth® phone.
 This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of cellular phone.
 Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring contact data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
 To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.

3 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

2. SETUP

When the contact is registered

1 Select

“Transfer

Contacts

from

Phone”.

2 Select “Replace Contacts” or “Add

Contact”.
“Replace Contacts”: Select to transfer the
contact from the connected cellular phone
and replace the current one.
“Add Contact”: Select to transfer the desired contact data from the connected cellular phone to add to the current one.

3 Transfer the contact data to the system
using a Bluetooth® phone.
 This operation may be unnecessary
depending on the type of cellular phone.
 Depending on the type of cellular phone,
OBEX authentication may be required
when transferring contact data. Enter
“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
 To cancel this function, select “Cancel”.

■ UPDATING THE CONTACTS
(FROM THE “Call History”
SCREEN)*

1 Display the phone top screen.
(P. 349)

2 Select the “Call History” tab and select
a contact not yet registered in the contact list.

3 Select “Update Contact”.
4 Select the desired contact.
5 Select a phone type for the phone number.

*: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones,
this function is available when “Automatic
Transfer” is set to off.
(P. 366)

4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-

PHONE

played when the operation is complete.

369

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. SETUP

REGISTERING A NEW
CONTACT TO THE
CONTACTS LIST
New contact data can be registered.
Up to 4 numbers per person can be registered.

1 Select “New Contact”.
2 Enter the name and select “OK”.
3 Enter the phone number and select
“OK”.

4 Select the phone type for the phone
number.

EDITING THE CONTACT
DATA

1 Select “Edit Contact”.
2 Select the desired contact.
3 Select the desired name or number.
For editing the name

4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A

NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACTS LIST” from “STEP 2”. (P.
370)
For editing the number

4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A

5 To add another number to this contact,

NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACTS LIST” from “STEP 3”. (P.
370)

■ REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT
IN A DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE
“Call History” SCREEN)

■ EDITING THE CONTACT IN A DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE “Contact Details” SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen.

select “Yes”.

(P. 349)

2 Select the “Call History” tab and select
a contact not yet registered in the contact list.

3 Select “Add to Contacts”.
4 Follow the steps in “REGISTERING A

NEW CONTACT TO THE CONTACTS LIST” from “STEP 2”. (P.
370)

370

LS460_600h_Navi_U

(P. 349)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” or
“Favorites” tab and select the desired
contact.

3 Select “Edit Contact”.
“E-mail Addresses”: Select to display all
registered e-mail addresses for the contact.

4 Follow the steps in “EDITING THE

CONTACT DATA” from “STEP 3”.
(P. 370)

2. SETUP

DELETING THE CONTACT
DATA

FAVORITES LIST SETTING

1 Select “Delete Contacts”.
2 Select the desired contact and select

Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 numbers per contact) can be registered in
the favorites list.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation

■ REGISTERING THE CONTACTS
IN THE FAVORITES LIST

“Delete”.

screen appears.

INFORMATION

●Multiple data can be selected and
deleted at the same time.

■ DELETING THE CONTACT IN A
DIFFERENT WAY (FROM THE
“Contact Details” SCREEN)

1 Display the phone top screen.
(P. 349)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” or
3 Select “Delete Contact”.
4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

favorites list.

 Dimmed contacts are already stored as a
favorite.

3 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-

played when the operation is complete.
When 15 contacts have already been
registered to the favorites list

1 When 15 contacts have already been

registered to the favorites list, a regis8
tered contact needs to be replaced.
Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears to replace a contact.

2 Select the contact to be replaced.
3 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

INFORMATION

●When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted, the
contact data will be deleted at the same
time.

371

LS460_600h_Navi_U

PHONE

“Favorites” tab and select the desired
contact.

1 Select “Add Favorite”.
2 Select the desired contact to add to the

2. SETUP

Registering contacts in the favorites list in
a different way (from the “Contacts”
screen)

1 Display the phone top screen.
(P. 349)

2 Select the “Contacts” tab.
3 Select (grey) at the beginning of the

desired contact list name to be registered in the favorites list.

■ DELETING THE CONTACTS IN
THE FAVORITES LIST

1 Select “Remove Favorite”.
2 Select the desired contacts and select
“Remove”.

3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

4 Check that a confirmation screen is dis-

played when the operation is complete.
Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a
different way (from the “Contacts”
screen)

1 Display the phone top screen.
(P. 349)

 When selected, (grey) is changed to
(yellow), and the contact is registered in
the favorites list.

Registering contacts in the favorites list in
a different way (from the “Contact Details” screen)

1 Display the phone top screen.
(P. 349)

2 Select the “Contacts” or “Call History”
tab and select the desired contact.

3 Select “Add Favorite”.
4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

372

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2 Select the “Contacts” tab.
3 Select (yellow) at the beginning of the
contact list name to be deleted from the
favorites list.

 When selected, (yellow) is changed to
(grey), and the data is deleted from the
list.

2. SETUP

Deleting contacts in the favorites list in a
different way (from the “Contact Details”
screen)

1 Display the phone top screen.
(P. 349)

2 Select the “Contacts”, “Call History” or

“Favorites” tab and select the desired
contact to delete.

“Messaging” SCREEN

1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen.
(P. 364)

2 Select “Messaging”.
3 Select the desired item to be set.

3 Select “Remove Favorite”.
4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

5 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.

No.

Function
Select to set automatic message
transfer on/off.
Select to set automatic message readout on/off.

Select to set display of messaging account names on the inbox tab on/off.
When set to on, messaging account
names used on the cellular phone will
be displayed.
Select to set adding the vehicle signature to outgoing messages on/off.
Select to reset all setup items.
INFORMATION

●Depending on the phone, these functions
may not be available.

373

LS460_600h_Navi_U

8
PHONE

Select to set updating message read
status on phone on/off.

2. SETUP

“Notifications” SCREEN

1 Display the “Phone Settings” screen.
(P. 364)

2 Select “Notifications”.
3 Select the desired item to be set.

No.

Function
Select to change where the screen is
displayed between the “Main Display” and “Side Display”.
“Main Screen”: Select to display and
operate the screen on the “Main Display”.
“Side Screen”: Select to display and
operate the screen on the “Side Display”. For details of the screen:
P. 415
Select to set the SMS/MMS notification popup on/off.
Select to set the e-mail notification
popup on/off.
Select to change the incoming SMS/
MMS display.
“Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMS
message is received, the incoming
SMS/MMS display screen is displayed and can be operated on the
screen.
“Drop-Down”: When an SMS/
MMS message is received, a message is displayed on the upper side
of the screen.
Select to change the incoming email display.
“Full Screen”: When an e-mail is received, the incoming e-mail display
screen is the displayed and can be
operated on the screen.
“Drop-Down”: When an e-mail is received, a message is displayed on
the upper side of the screen.
Select to set display of the contact/
history transfer completion message
on/off.
Select to reset all setup items.

INFORMATION

●Depending on the phone, these functions
may not be available.
374

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

1. TROUBLESHOOTING
If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth® device, first check the
table below.
When using the hands-free system with a Bluetooth® device
Page
Symptom

The hands-free system or Bluetooth®
device does not
work.

Likely cause

Solution

Cellular
phone

This
system

The connected device may not be a
compatible
Bluetooth® cellular
phone.

For a list of specific
devices
which
operation has been
confirmed on this
system, check with
your Lexus dealer or
the
following
website:
http://
www.lexus.com/
MobileLink





The Bluetooth® version of the connected
cellular phone may
be older than the
specified version.

Use a cellular phone
with Bluetooth® version 2.0 or higher
(recommended: Ver.
3.0 +EDR or higher).



8
PHONE
375

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

When registering/connecting a cellular phone
Page
Symptom

A cellular phone cannot be registered.

A Bluetooth® connection cannot be
made.

Likely cause

Solution

An incorrect passcode was entered on
the cellular phone.

Cellular
phone

This
system

Enter the correct
passcode on the cellular phone.





The registration operation has not been
completed on the
cellular phone side.

Complete the registration operation on
the cellular phone
(approve registration
on the phone).





Old registration information remains on
either this system or
the cellular phone.

Delete the existing
registration information from both this
system and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone
you wish to connect
to this system.



Another Bluetooth®
device is already
connected.

Manually connect
the cellular phone
you wish to use to this
system.



Bluetooth® function
is not enabled on the
cellular phone.

Enable
the
®
Bluetooth function
on the cellular phone.





Automatic
Bluetooth® connection on this system is
set to off.

Set
automatic
Bluetooth® connection on this system to
on when the engine
switch is in
ACCESSORY or
IGNITION
ON
mode.



Set preferred device
settings function on
this system to off.



Set the desired cellular phone to the highest
automatic
connection priority.



Preferred device settings function on this
system is set to on.

376

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

Page
Symptom

“Unable to dial.
Please check your
phone.” message is
displayed.

Likely cause

Solution

Bluetooth® function
is not enabled on the
cellular phone.

Old registration information remains on
either this system or
the cellular phone.

Cellular
phone

This
system

Enable
the
Bluetooth® function
on the cellular phone.





Delete the existing
registration information from both this
system and the cellular phone, then register the cellular phone
you wish to connect
to this system.



When making/receiving a call
Page
Likely cause

Solution

A call cannot be
made/received.

Your vehicle is in a
“No Service” area.

Move to where “No
Service” no longer
appears on the display.

Cellular
phone

This
system
8



PHONE

Symptom

377

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

When using the phonebook
Page
Symptom

Phonebook
data
cannot be transferred manually/automatically.

Phonebook
data
cannot be edited.

378

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Likely cause

Solution

Cellular
phone

This
system

The profile version of
the connected cellular phone may not be
compatible
with
transferring phonebook data.

For a list of specific
devices
which
operation has been
confirmed on this
system, check with
your Lexus dealer or
the
following
website:
http://
www.lexus.com/
MobileLink





Automatic contact
transfer function on
this system is set to
off.

Set automatic contact transfer function
on this system to on.



366

Passcode has not
been entered on the
cellular phone.

Enter the passcode
on the cellular phone
if requested (default
passcode: 1234).





Transfer operation
on the cellular phone
has not completed.

Complete transfer
operation on the cellular phone (approve
transfer operation on
the phone).





Automatic contact
transfer function on
this system is set to
on.

Set automatic contact transfer function
on this system to off.



366

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

When using the Bluetooth® message function
Page
Symptom

Messages cannot be
viewed.

New message notifications are not displayed.

Likely cause

Solution

Message transfer is
not enabled on the
cellular phone.

Cellular
phone

This
system

Enable
message
transfer on the cellular phone (approve
message transfer on
the phone).





Automatic transfer
function on this system is set to off.

Set automatic transfer function on this
system to on.



373

Notification of SMS/
MMS/E-mail reception on this system is
set to off.

Set notification of
SMS/MMS/E-mail
reception on this system to on.



374

Automatic message
transfer function is
not enabled on the
cellular phone.

Enable
automatic
transfer function on
the cellular phone.




8
PHONE

In other situations
Page
Symptom

Likely cause

Solution

The Bluetooth® connection status is displayed at the top of
the screen each time
the engine
switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.

Connection confirmation display on this
system is set to on.

To turn off the display, set connection
confirmation display
on this system to off.

Cellular
phone

This
system



379

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. WHAT TO DO IF...

Page
Symptom

Likely cause

Solution

The cellular phone is
not close enough to
this system.
Radio interference
has occurred.

Even though all conceivable measures
have been taken, the
symptom status does
not change.
The cellular phone is
the most likely cause
of the symptom.

Cellular
phone

This
system

Bring the cellular
phone closer to this
system.



Turn off Wi-Fi® devices or other devices that may emit
radio waves.



Turn the cellular
phone off, remove
and reinstall the battery pack, and then
restart the cellular
phone.





Enable the cellular
phone’s Bluetooth®
connection.





Disable the Wi-Fi®
connection of the
cellular phone.





Stop the cellular
phone’s security software and close all applications.





Before using an application installed on
the cellular phone,
carefully check its
source and how its
operation might affect this system.





: For details, refer to the owner’s manual that came with the cellular phone.

380

LS460_600h_Navi_U

9
1

LEXUS ENFORM*
2

LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW............... 382
LEXUS Enform Remote....................................... 383
LEXUS Enform Service Connect .................... 383

2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED
BY USING A CELLULAR
PHONE.................................................... 384
BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ............. 386
PREPARATION BEFORE USING
LEXUS App Suite................................................ 387

3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED
BY USING DCM AND
THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM ......... 388

2 LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

1. LEXUS Enform Remote......................... 392
2. LEXUS Enform Service Connect ....... 393
3. LEXUS App Suite..................................... 394
USING LEXUS App Suite.................................. 394
LINKING LEXUS App Suite AND
NAVIGATION SYSTEM LOCAL
FUNCTION .......................................................... 398
ENTERING KEYWORD
OPERATION ....................................................... 399

4. LEXUS Enform Destinations................ 400
Destination Assist .................................................... 400

BEFORE USING THE FUNCTION ............. 389

eDestination................................................................. 401

4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED
BY USING DCM ................................... 391

5. Lexus Insider .............................................. 403
NEW MESSAGE NOTIFICATION.............. 403
VIEWING AND PLAYING RECEIVED
Lexus Insider MESSAGES.............................. 403

3 SETUP
1. LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS.............. 406
SCREEN FOR LEXUS App Suite
SETTINGS.............................................................. 406

LEXUS Enform connected services consists of five products:
 LEXUS Enform Safety Connect
 LEXUS Enform Service Connect
 LEXUS Enform Remote
 LEXUS Enform Destinations
 LEXUS Enform App Suite
For availability and to learn more, visit http://www.lexus.com/enform/.
*: With navigation function
381

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

1. FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW
Lexus Enform is a service that includes Safety Connect, Service Connect, Remote,
Destinations, Insider and App Suite.
 The functions included in Lexus Enform are classified into the following three types.

Type A: Function achieved by using a cellular phone
Type B: Function achieved by using an embedded cellular device in the vehicle
(DCM: Data Communication Module) and the navigation system
Type C: Function achieved by using DCM
Function

Type

LEXUS App Suite

Type A

LEXUS Enform Destinations
(Destination Assist, eDestination)

Type B

Lexus Insider

Type B

LEXUS Enform Safety Connect

Type C

 Each function is available in the following areas:
• LEXUS App Suite is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and
Alaska.
• LEXUS Enform Destinations is available in the contiguous United States, Washington
D.C. and limited areas of Alaska for vehicles that contain the appropriate map data.
• Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and
Alaska.
• LEXUS Enform Safety Connect features include:
Automatic Collision Notification, Emergency Assistance, Stolen Vehicle Location
(available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C., Hawaii, Alaska, and
Canada) and Enhanced Roadside Assistance (available in the contiguous United
States, Washington D.C., Alaska, and Canada).
INFORMATION

●Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform service is dependent on network reception
level.

382

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

LEXUS Enform Remote
LEXUS Enform Remote is a cellular phone application that lets you view and remotely
control certain aspects of your vehicle.
For details about the functions and services of this application, refer to http://
www.lexus.com/enform/.
 Function of the LEXUS Enform Remote is achieved by using an embedded cellular
device in the vehicle (DCM: Data Communication Module).
 Lexus Enform Remote is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C.
and Alaska.

LEXUS Enform Service Connect
Lexus Enform Service Connect uses embedded telematics hardware to collect and
transmit vehicle data that allows Lexus to provide:
Vehicle Health Report (VHR)
(Safety Recalls, Service Campaigns, Current Vehicle Alerts, Required Maintenance, and Vehicle Condition Status)
Maintenance Notifications
Vehicle Alert Notifications
For details about this service and how to register, refer to
http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

383

LS460_600h_Navi_U

9
LEXUS ENFORM

 The Lexus Enform Service Connect is achieved by using a Data Communication Module (DCM) built into the vehicle.
 Lexus Enform Service Connect is available in the contiguous United States,
Washington D.C., Hawaii, Alaska, and Canada.

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

2. TYPE A: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING A CELLULAR PHONE
Of the functions included with Lexus Enform, the App Suite relies on the use of a cellular phone.
App Suite enables applicable apps installed on a cellular phone to be displayed on and
operated from the navigation screen via a Bluetooth®. A few settings must be performed before App Suite can be used. (P. 387)

384

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

No.

Name

Function

Content provider

Provides contents to the navigation system via a cellular phone.

Application server

Provides applications to the navigation system via a cellular
phone.

Cellular phone*

Using the App Suite, communication is relayed between the
navigation system, application server and contents provider.
The cellular phone cannot be operated while communicating.

Applications

Display usable content from the content providers on the screen
using the data connection of the connected cellular phone.

Navigation system

Content received, via a cellular phone, from content provider
servers is displayed on the navigation screen. The navigation
system is equipped with an application player to run applications.

*: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink.

9
LEXUS ENFORM
385

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

BEFORE USING THE
FUNCTION
SUBSCRIPTION
 User registration is required to start using
the App Suite function. (P. 387)
 App Suite does not require an activation
fee or monthly recurring fees.
 Services requiring a separate contract can
also be used.*

*: For details, refer to
http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call
1-800-255-3987.

AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION
 LEXUS App Suite is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and
Alaska.
INFORMATION

●Data usage fees may apply while using
App Suite function. Confirm data usage
fees before using this function.
●The required operations to activate applications and connect a cellular phone to
the navigation system, and the registration steps for the App Suite are explained
in this section. For details regarding operation of the App Suite and the applications, refer to
http://www.lexus.com/enform/.
●Availability of functions of the Lexus
Enform service is dependent on network
reception level.

386

LS460_600h_Navi_U

INITIALIZING PERSONAL
DATA
The personal data used in applications
can be reset. (P. 61)
 The following personal data can be deleted
and returned to their default settings:
• Downloaded contents
• Radio stations that were listened to
• Input history
INFORMATION

●Once initialized, data will be erased. Pay
close attention when initializing data.

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

PREPARATION BEFORE
USING LEXUS App Suite
SETTINGS REQUIRED TO USE
LEXUS App Suite
Perform the settings in the following order.

1 User registration

USER REGISTRATION
Perform user registration at http://
www.lexus.com/enform/ or register within
the App Suite application after you download it onto your cellular phone.

REGISTERING THE LEXUS App
Suite APPLICATION

1 Download the App Suite application to
2 Download the App Suite application to
your cellular phone.

3 Register the cellular phone with the
navigation system.

In order to use App Suite, the following
must first be performed:

 Register a Bluetooth® phone with the
hands-free system. (P. 39)

2 Run the App Suite application on your
cellular phone.

3 Enter the information required into the
App Suite application. Login to the application.

INFORMATION

●Applications can only be used when the
App Suite application has been downloaded to your cellular phone and the
application is running.
●App Suite operational procedures can
also be confirmed by visiting
http://www.lexus.com/enform/.
●In order to use applications, it is necessary to run the App Suite application on
your cellular phone.
●If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth®
and USB at the same time, system operation may become unstable. For known
phone compatibility information, refer to
http://www.lexus.com/enform/.
●If a App Suite application is used while
iPod audio/video is being played back,
system operation may become unstable.

387

LS460_600h_Navi_U

9
LEXUS ENFORM

 User registration with the service
(P. 387)
 Download the App Suite application onto
your cellular phone, and login to the application. (P. 387)
 Register the cellular phone, on which the
App Suite application was installed, with
the navigation system. (P. 387)

your cellular phone.

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

3. TYPE B: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM AND THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The functionality of Lexus Enform Safety Connect, Lexus Enform Destinations, and
Lexus Insider is made possible through the shared work of the DCM and the navigation system.
These are subscription-based telematics services that use Global Positioning System
(GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security as well
as convenience features.
These services are available by subscription on select, telematics hardware-equipped
vehicles and supported by Lexus’ designated response center, which operates 24
hours a day, 7 days a week.

388

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

BEFORE USING THE
FUNCTION
SUBSCRIPTION
 After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are
enrolled, you can begin receiving services.
A variety of subscription terms are available. Contact your Lexus dealer, or call 1800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987), for
further subscription details. (P. 400)

AVAILABILITY OF
FUNCTION(S)
 Destinations is available in the contiguous
United States, Washington D.C. and limited
areas of Alaska for vehicles that contain the
appropriate map data.
 Lexus Insider is available in the contiguous
United States, Washington D.C. and
Alaska.

ACTIVATION OF
FUNCTION(S)
 Enrollment in Lexus Enform Safety Connect (via your dealership) is required to
activate all functions.
 Certification for Lexus Enform Safety
Connect

FCC ID: O6Y-CDMRF101
FCC ID: XOECDMRF101B
FCC ID: N7NGTM2

FCC WARNING
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets
the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C
to OET65.
This equipment should be installed and
operated keeping the radiator at least
20cm or more away from person’s
body (excluding extremities: hands,
wrists, feet and ankles).

9
LEXUS ENFORM

389

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

INFORMATION

●Exposure to radio frequency signals:
The Lexus Enform system installed in
your vehicle includes a low power radio
transmitter and receiver. The system
receives and also sends out radio frequency (RF) signals.
●In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted RF
exposure guidelines with safety levels for
mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines
are consistent with the safety standards
previously set by both U.S. and international standards bodies.
• ANSI (American National Standards
Institute) C95.1 [1992]
• NCRP (National Council on Radiation
Protection and Measurement) Report
86 [1986]
• ICNIRP (International Commission on
Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection)
[1996]
●These standards are based on comprehensive and periodic evaluations of the
relevant scientific literature. Over 120
scientists, engineers, and physicians from
universities, government health agencies, and industry reviewed the available
body of research to develop the ANSI
Standard (C95.1).
●The design of Lexus Enform system complies with the FCC guidelines in addition
to those standards.

390

LS460_600h_Navi_U

INFORMATION

●Contact with the Lexus response center
is dependent upon the telematics device
being in operative condition, cellular connection availability, navigation map data,
and GPS satellite signal reception, which
can limit the ability to reach the response
center or receive support. Enrollment
and Telematics Subscription Service
Agreement required. A variety of subscription terms are available; charges
vary by subscription term selected.
●The Lexus response center offers support in multiple languages.
●Select Lexus Enform Safety Connectsubscribed vehicles are capable of communicating vehicle information. Please
see the terms and conditions for additional details.
Owners who do not wish to have their
vehicle transmit this information can opt
out at the time of enrollment or by calling
1-800-255-3987 and following the
prompts for Lexus Enform Safety Connect.
●For further details about the service, contact your Lexus dealer.
●Lexus Enform functions are not subject to
section 255 of the Telecommunications
Act and the system is not TTY compatible.

1. LEXUS ENFORM-OVERVIEW

4. TYPE C: FUNCTION ACHIEVED BY USING DCM
The functionality of Lexus Enform Safety Connect is made possible by the use of a
DCM.
For details, refer to “Owner’s Manual”.

9
LEXUS ENFORM
391

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

1. LEXUS Enform Remote
For details about the functions and services provided by this app, refer to
http://www.lexus.com/enform/.
SUBSCRIPTION
 After you sign the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement (see the LEXUS Enform
Safety Connect section in “Owner’s Manual”), download the LEXUS Enform Remote
app from your cellular phone’s app store, and register within the app (or enroll and complete registration at the dealer), you can begin using these services.
 A variety of subscription terms are available. Contact your Lexus dealer, or call 1-80025-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) for further subscription details.

AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION
 Lexus Enform Remote is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C.,
and Alaska.
INFORMATION

●Lexus Enform Remote should only be used by authorized users.
●Laws in some communities may require that the vehicle be within view of the user when
operating Lexus Enform Remote.
In some states, use of Lexus Enform Remote may violate state or local laws. Before using
Lexus Enform Remote, check your state and local laws.
●Any malfunction of the Lexus should be repaired by your Lexus dealer.
●Lexus Enform Remote is designed to work at temperatures above -22 F (-30 C). This
specification is related to the Lexus Enform Remote operation, but is dependent on the
vehicle’s operating temperature range which may be different.
●Content is subject to change without notice.
●Some features of the Lexus Enform Remote may not be available on some models.
●Additional information can be found at www.lexus.com/enform/.

392

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

2. LEXUS Enform Service Connect
For details about this service and how to register, refer to
http://www.lexus.com/enform/.
AVAILABILITY OF FUNCTION
 Lexus Enform Service Connect is available in the contiguous United States,
Washington D.C., Hawaii, Alaska, and Canada.
INFORMATION

●Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform Service Connect is dependent on network
reception level.

9
LEXUS ENFORM
393

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

3. LEXUS App Suite
USING LEXUS App Suite

3 Select the desired application screen

App Suite is a function that enables applicable apps installed on a cellular
phone to be displayed on and operated
from the navigation screen. Before App
Suite can be used, a few settings need to
be performed. (P. 387)
For details about the functions and services provided by each application, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

: Select to activate an application.
“Update”: Select to update the applications. (P. 395)
“Reorder”: Select to change the order of
the applications. (P. 396)

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

2 Select “LEXUS App Suite”.

394

LS460_600h_Navi_U

button.

: Displays the number of new notifications for the application

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

UPDATING AN APPLICATION
When App Suite is activated, an application may need to be updated. By updating the application, it can be kept to the
latest version. To update an application,
it is necessary to download update data
and install it.
■ DOWNLOADING UPDATE

3 Check that downloading is complete.
“Later”: Select to install later. When this
screen button is selected, the screen will
return to the last displayed screen. To install the update data: P. 396
“See Detail”: Select to display detailed information on the update data.
“Install”: Select to install the update data.
Follow the steps “INSTALLING THE UPDATE DATA” from “STEP 2”.(P. 396)

If an update is available, “Update” can
be selected.

1 Select “Update” on the “LEXUS App
Suite” screen. (P. 394)

2 Check that downloading starts.
“Download in Background”: Select to operate other functions while downloading.
“Cancel”: Select to cancel updating.

9
LEXUS ENFORM
395

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

■ INSTALLING THE UPDATE DATA
After the downloading is complete,
“Update” will be changed to “Install”.

1 Select “Install” on the “LEXUS App
Suite” screen. (P. 394)

2 Select “Continue”.
“Later”: Select to postpone the installation
of the update data and go back to the previous screen.

3 Check that installing is started.
“Install in Background”: Select to operate
other function while installing.

4 Select “OK” after the installing is complete.

INFORMATION

●The App Suite function cannot be operated while installing.

396

LS460_600h_Navi_U

REORDERING THE
APPLICATIONS
Order of the applications can be
changed.

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.
(P. 394)

2 Select “Reorder”.
3 Select the desired application to be
moved.

4 Select “<<” or “>>” to move the application, and select “OK”.

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN
When problems occur with starting the application player, a message will appear on
the screen. Referring to the table below, identify the problem and take the suggested
corrective action.
Display conditions

Corrective action

“This feature is unavailable
during an emergency call.”

Safety Connect is being implemented.

After the Safety Connect call
is finished, perform the operation again.

“This feature is unavailable
while transferring contacts.”

Contacts are being transferred manually from the
phonebook.

When the transfer of contacts
is complete, perform the operation again.

“Unable to connect to a
Bluetooth* phone. For troubleshooting
assistance,
please visit the Lexus website
or contact your dealer.”

The cellular phone cannot be
connected.

Refer
to
http://
www.lexus.com/enform/ to
confirm if the phone is compatible or not.

“This feature is unavailable
during a handsfree call.”

A hands-free call is in
progress.

After the hands-free call is finished, perform the operation.

“To use the services, an active
application needs to be running on your phone. For more
information, please visit
lexus.com.”

The LEXUS App Suite application cannot be connected
to Bluetooth® SPP.

Refer
to
http://
www.lexus.com/enform/ to
confirm if the phone is
Bluetooth® SPP compatible
or not, and then activate the
App Suite application.

“Communication error.
Please try again.”

Communication was disconnected.

After a few moments, retry the
operation.

*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

397

LS460_600h_Navi_U

9
LEXUS ENFORM

Message

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

LINKING LEXUS App Suite
AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
LOCAL FUNCTION
The setting a destination and making a
hands-free call functions of the navigation system can be performed via App
Suite. For details about the functions and
services provided by each application,
refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote
Touch.

SETTING A DESTINATION
USING LEXUS App Suite
Locations that were searched for using
the App Suite can be set as a destination.

1 Display the “Web Search” screen.
(P. 398)

2 Select the desired application screen
button to perform search.

3
4
5
6

Enter a search term, and select “Go”.
Select “Map”.
Select “Go to

”.

Select “OK” to start guidance.

 For the operation of the route guidance
screen and the function of each screen
button: P. 101

2 Select “Dest.”.
3 Select “Web Search”.
4 Check that the “Web Search” screen is
displayed.

398

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

MAKING A PHONE CALL
USING LEXUS App Suite

ENTERING A KEYWORD
USING THE SOFTWARE
KEYBOARD

Phone calls can be made to locations
which were searched for using App
Suite.

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.

1 Display the “Web Search” screen.

2 Select the desired application screen

3 Select the character entering space.
4 Enter a search term, and then select

(P. 398)

button to perform search.

3 Enter a search term, and select “Go”.
4 Select “Call”.
5 Select “Yes”.
“Cancel”: Select to cancel making a phone
call.

6 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

 For phone operation and the function of
each screen button: P. 356

A keyword can be entered to an application by the software keyboard or
voice recognition function. For details
about the functions and services provided by each application, refer to
http://www.lexus.com/enform/.

button.

“OK”.

5 Entering characters will be reflected on
the character entering space.

 For details on operating the keyboard:
P. 34

ENTERING A KEYWORD
USING THE VOICE
RECOGNITION FUNCTION

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite” screen.
(P. 394)

2 Select the desired application screen
button.

3 Press the talk switch. (P. 298)
4 Say the desired keyword.
 Completion of the keyword will be
detected automatically.

5 Search results will be displayed on the
screen.

 The keyboard layout can be changed.

(P. 56)

399

LS460_600h_Navi_U

LEXUS ENFORM

ENTERING KEYWORD
OPERATION

(P. 394)

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

4. LEXUS Enform Destinations
Destination Assist
Destinations provide you with live assistance for finding destinations via the
Lexus response center. You can request
either a specific business, address, or
ask for help locating your desired destination by category, such as restaurants,
gas stations, shopping centers or other
Points of Interest (POI).
After you tell the agent your choice of
destination, its coordinates are sent
wirelessly to your vehicle’s navigation
system.

4 When an agent comes on the line, tell

the agent the address, business name,
or the type of POI or service.

 To adjust the call volume, select “-” or “+”,
or use the volume switch on the steering
wheel during the call.
 To hang up the phone, select “Disconnect”
or press the
switch on the steering
wheel.

5 After the agent helps you determine
your location of choice, this screen is
displayed. Select the screen button of
the desired action.

MAKE A CALL WITH
Destination Assist

1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote
Touch.

No.

Function
Select to register as a memory point.
Select to set as a destination.
Select to display detailed information.
Select to call the registered number.

2 Select “Dest.”.
3 Select “Destination Assist”.

400

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

DOWNLOADING
eDestinations

eDestination
With the eDestination feature, you can
go online, and via the Lexus.com owner’s Web site, select and organize destinations of your choice and then
wirelessly send them to your vehicle’s
navigation system. Up to 200 locations
can be stored online and accessed or
updated at any time.

After updating eDestination folders online, it is necessary to download the updated data to the vehicle.

1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote
Touch.

 Locations can be organized into up to 20
personalized folders.
INFORMATION

●You must first go online at
www.lexus.com/drivers/ to view the
Owners site where you will need to register and log in. After this, personalized
folders that contain the locations to be
sent to your vehicle can be created. (See
Lexus Enform Guide for more information.)

2
3
4
5
6

Select “Dest.”.
Slect “Point of Interest”.
Select “eDestination”.
Select “Download”.

7 Check that downloading starts.
 The most recent Destinations data will be
loaded to the navigation system.

401

LS460_600h_Navi_U

9
LEXUS ENFORM

Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

SEARCHING eDestinations

1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote

7 Select the screen button of the desired
action.

Touch.

No.

Function
Select to register as a memory point.

2
3
4
5

Select “Dest.”.

Select to set as a destination.

Select “Point of Interest”.

Select to call the registered number.

Select “eDestination”.
Select the desired eDestination category.

6 Select the desired location.

DISPLAYING eDestination
ICONS

1 Select

on the map screen.

(P. 72)

2 Select “Map Information”.
3 Select “eDestination”.

402

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

5. Lexus Insider
Lexus Insider is an optional function that
can send audio messages, or articles, to
participating owners’ vehicles via the
navigation system. Potential Lexus
Insider subjects might include, for example, Lexus vehicle technology tips, updates on regional Lexus events, or audio
excerpts from Lexus Magazine articles.

VIEWING AND PLAYING
RECEIVED Lexus Insider
MESSAGES

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

NEW MESSAGE
NOTIFICATION
When the vehicle is first powered on and
a new Lexus Insider article is available, a
notification will appear on the navigation
screen.The notice will appear for only
approximately 6 seconds unless one of
the options listed is selected.

1 When the new message notification ap-

“Read All”: Select to listen to all stored
Lexus Insider broadcasts.
 To disrupt the audio read of Lexus Insider,
press the “MODE” switch on the steering 9
wheel, or press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA”
button on the audio system.

LEXUS ENFORM

pears, any of the following options can
be selected.
“Listen Now”: Select to play newly received Lexus Insider article(s).
“Listen Later”: Select to close the notification screen without playing articles. The
notification screen will be displayed again
when the engine switch is turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.

2 Select “Info”.
3 Select “Lexus Insider”.
4 Select the desired article title.

403

LS460_600h_Navi_U

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

MESSAGE ICONS
Icons appear at the left of the Lexus
Insider story titles and indicate the following.
Icon

Article
Unread article
Previously read article
Unread article with
downloadable Point of
Interest (POI)
Previously read article
with downloadable Point
of Interest (POI)

404

LS460_600h_Navi_U

LISTENING TO ANOTHER
ARTICLE

1 Display the “LEXUS Insider” screen.
(P. 403)

2 Select the desired article.
3 Select “Next” or “Previous” to listen to
another article.

 The “ ” or “ ” switch on the steering wheel
can be used to move to the previous or next
article.
 To stop listening to the broadcast, select
“Stop” or press the “PWR·VOL” knob of
the audio system.

2. LEXUS ENFORM OPERATION

DOWNLOADING A POI

DELETING Lexus Insider
ARTICLE

Some Lexus Insider articles will contain
a downloadable POI relevant to the
content.

1 Display the “LEXUS Insider” screen.

2 Select “Delete”.
3 Select the item to be deleted and select

(P. 403)

2 Select the desired article.
3 Select “Enter ”.
 If a POI is contained, “Enter ” can be
selected to download a POI to the navigation system.

(P. 403)

“Delete”.

4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

4 Select “Go” to set the POI as a destination with route directions.

9
LEXUS ENFORM
405

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. SETUP

1. LEXUS App Suite SETTINGS
The settings of App Suite can be
changed.

SCREEN FOR LEXUS App Suite
SETTINGS

1 Press the “MENU” button on the
Remote Touch.

No.

2 Select “Setup”.
3 Select “LEXUS App Suite”.
4 Select the items to be set.

406

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Information

Page

Select to set the voice guidance volume.



Select to set the pop up reminder for cellular phone
data usage.

407

Select to set Lexus Insider
settings.

407

Select to reset all setup
items.



3. SETUP

PHONE DATA PLAN POP-UP
SETTINGS

Lexus Insider SETTINGS

The phone data plan pop-up can be set
when a paid application is downloaded.

Lexus Insider settings, notification, and
opt in or out of article receipt can be
changed.

1 Display the “LEXUS App Suite Set-

2 Select “Mobile Data Usage Notifica-

2 Select “LEXUS Insider”.
3 Select the items to be set.

tings” screen. (P. 406)
tion”.

3 Check the desired function to be oper-

tings” screen. (P. 406)

ated.

No.

Function
Select to set the receiving of Lexus Insider articles yes/no.
Select to set the new message notification on/off.

LEXUS ENFORM

Select to reset all setup items.

407

LS460_600h_Navi_U

3. SETUP

408

LS460_600h_Navi_U

10
1

12.3-INCH DISPLAY
2

12.3-INCH DISPLAY
OPERATION

1. 12.3-INCH
4
DISPLAY-OVERVIEW ....................... 410
FULL SCREEN DISPLAY .................................... 410
SPLIT-SCREEN DISPLAY................................... 410

2. USING “Side Display” ............................. 412
BASIC SCREENS .................................................... 412

INTERRUPTION SCREENS .............................. 414

409

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY-OVERVIEW
FULL SCREEN DISPLAY
The following functions can be displayed full screen:
Function

Page

Initial screen

“Menu” screen

Map screen*

*: With navigation function

SPLIT-SCREEN DISPLAY
Different information can be displayed on the left and right of the screen. For example,
audio screen can be displayed and operated while the map screen is being displayed.
The large screen on the left of the display is called the “Main Display”, and the small
screen to the right is called the “Side Display”.

“Main Display”

410

LS460_600h_Navi_U

“Side Display”

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

“Main Display”
For details about the functions and operation of the “Main Display”, refer to the
respective section.
“Side Display”
The following functions can be displayed
and operated on the “Side Display”.
Basic screens
Function

Page

Navigation system

412

Audio

413

Phone

414

Vehicle information

“Owner’s
Manual”

Air conditioning

“Owner’s
Manual”

OPERATING
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE
SPLIT-SCREEN DISPLAY
When the split-screen is displayed, it is
necessary to select the screen you wish
to operate (“Main Display” or “Side Display”).
When selecting the “Main Display”

1 Move the Remote Touch knob to the

left.
When selecting the “Side Display”

1 Move the Remote Touch knob to the
right.

Interrupt screens
Function

Page
335

Phone

415

Destination Assist*

400

Driving mode

“Owner’s
Manual”

Lexus night view

“Owner’s
Manual”

10
12.3-INCH DISPLAY

Intuitive parking assist

*: With navigation function

411

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

2. USING “Side Display”
BASIC SCREENS
To change the screen displayed on the
“Side Display”, use the screen buttons
on the right side of the display.
SWITCHING THE BASIC
SCREEN

1 Select the desired button.

No.

NAVIGATION SYSTEM
A map* or a compass with information
about the current position can be displayed.
The orientation can be changed between 2D north-up, 2D heading-up and
3D heading-up by selecting the orientation symbol.(P.77)

Function
Select to display the navigation
screen.
Select to display the audio control
screen.
Select to display the phone screen.
Select to display the vehicle information screen.
Select to display the air conditioning
control screen.

*: With navigation function
412

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
■ SELECTING AN AUDIO SOURCE

1 Select “”.

2 Select the desired source.
■ RADIO OPERATION
On the “Side Display”, preset stations
can be selected.

■ MEDIA OPERATION
Operations such as selecting a chapter,
file or track are carried out on the
screen.

No.

Function
 Select to select a chapter/track/
file.
 Select and hold to rewind.
Select to stop the video screen.
Select to play/pause.

“ ”, “ ”: Select to tune in to the desired
preset station/channel.

 Select to select a chapter/track/
file.
 During playback: Select and hold
to fast forward.
 During a pause: Select and hold to
slow forward.

●Depending on the audio source, some
functions may not be available.

413

LS460_600h_Navi_U

12.3-INCH DISPLAY

INFORMATION

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

HANDS-FREE SYSTEM (FOR
CELLULAR PHONE)
When hands-free mode is selected, it is
possible to make call on the “Side Display” if the desired contact is registered
on the 5 displayed buttons.

1 Select the desired contact.

INTERRUPTION SCREENS
Intuitive parking assist screen, phone
screen, etc. are displayed automatically
in accordance with conditions.
SWITCHING THE
INTERRUPTION SCREEN
When multiple interruption screens
have been opened, the hidden screens
can be brought forward and displayed
once again. (The driving mode screen
cannot be displayed again.)

1 Select “ ” or “ ” to select the desired
2 Check that the “Call” screen is displayed.

■ REGISTERING A NEW CONTACT
A contact can be selected from the favorites list. (P.371)

1 Select “Add From Favorites”.
2 Select the desired contact.
3 Select the desired number.
■ DELETING THE CONTACT

1 Select and hold the screen button to
change the contact.

2 Select “Yes” when the confirmation
screen appears.

414

LS460_600h_Navi_U

display.

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
(FOR CELLULAR PHONE)
The following functions can also be displayed and operated on the “Side Display”.
For details about these functions, refer
to the respective section.

Calling on the Bluetooth® phone
P.349
Incoming calls
P.355
Incoming call waiting
P.358
Talking on the Bluetooth® phone
P.356

■ DISPLAYING ON THE “Main Display”
The screen can be displayed on the
“Main Display” when carrying out an operation that cannot be conducted on the
“Side Display”.

1 Select

INFORMATION

●Operation is still possible using the steering phone switch even if the phone
screen is hidden behind another interruption screen. If the operation is conducted
using a steering switch, the phone screen
will automatically be brought to the front.
For details on operating the steering
phone switch and the “Main Display”:
P.344
10

INFORMATION

12.3-INCH DISPLAY

●If “Side Display” is selected for any of the
functions above and the function is activated, the status bar will be displayed on
the “Side Display”. For details about the
status bar: P.16

415

LS460_600h_Navi_U

1. 12.3-INCH DISPLAY OPERATION

416

LS460_600h_Navi_U

INDEX
2

417

LS460_600h_Navi_U

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Numerics
12.3-inch display ...................................................... 410
Full screen display.............................................. 410
Split-screen display............................................ 410

A
AAC........................................................... 168, 211, 213
Adding destinations.................................................. 112
“Address”....................................................................... 91
“Address Book”............................................... 96, 120
Adjacent road ............................................................ 115
AM.................................................................................. 151
Angle ............................................................................ 128
Applications.................................................. 382, 394
Area to avoid............................................................. 123
Arrival time................................................................. 105
Audio ............................................................................ 140
Audio screen adjustment................................ 148
Basic operation ................................................... 142
Disc slot .................................................................. 144
Selecting an audio source............................... 143
“Sound Settings” screen .................................. 146
System on/off....................................................... 142
USB/AUX port................................................... 145
Voice command system.................................. 150
Audio settings ........................................................... 199
Auto avoid traffic ...................................................... 131
Auto hide map buttons...........................................126
AUX................................................................................... 189
Control screen/panel....................................... 189
External options .................................................. 192
AUX port.......................................................... 145, 189

418

LS460_600h_Navi_U

B
Bluetooth® ..................................................................

39
Profiles...................................................................... 43
Registering a Bluetooth® audio player ........ 41
Registering a Bluetooth® phone................... 39
Bluetooth® audio.................................................... 184
Connecting........................................................... 188
Control screen/panel ...................................... 184
Listening................................................................. 188
Bluetooth® phone ................................................. 344
Basic operation.................................................. 345
Phone switch/microphone ........................... 346
Phonebook .......................................................... 348
Selling or disposing of the vehicle.............. 348
Voice command system................................. 347
Bluetooth® settings ................................................. 45
Bluetooth® setup screen.................................. 45
Connecting a Bluetooth® device................. 48
Deleting a Bluetooth® device ........................ 48
Detailed Bluetooth® settings.......................... 52
Editing the Bluetooth®
device information.......................................... 50
Registering a Bluetooth® device .................. 46

Caching a radio program.................................... 155
Calibration.................................................................. 129
Call history................................................................ 350
Calling on the Bluetooth® phone................... 349
Call history........................................................... 350
Dial pad................................................................. 353
Favorites lists....................................................... 350
Off hook switch ................................................. 354
Phonebook........................................................... 351
Camera...................................................................... 328
Camera display ................................... 37, 320, 327
Casual speech recognization........................... 305
CD................................................................................. 168
Control screen/panel ...................................... 168
Clock setting............................................................... 58
Command list .......................................................... 306
Connecting a Bluetooth® device...................... 48
Contacts .......................................................... 351, 366
“Coordinates”............................................................. 99
Current position........................................................ 75

Data services settings............................................ 316
Day mode ..................................................................... 37
DCM................................................................. 388, 391
Dealer setting.............................................................. 67
Deleting destinations .............................................. 113
Deleting personal data............................................. 61
Deleting previous destinations .......................... 125
Destination Assist.......................................... 96, 400
Destination search operation.............................. 88
“Address”.................................................................. 91
“Address Book”..................................................... 96
“Coordinates” ........................................................ 99
“Destination Assist” ............................................. 96
“Emergency” .......................................................... 97
Home........................................................................ 90
“Intersection & Freeway” .................................. 97
“Map”......................................................................... 99
“Point of Interest”.................................................. 92
Preset destinations.............................................. 90
“Previous Destinations” ..................................... 96
Search area............................................................ 90
Detailed navigation settings................................ 126
Detour............................................................................ 114
Dial pad...................................................................... 353
Disc slot ....................................................................... 144
Doppler weather ..................................................... 314
DSP ............................................................................... 148
DVD................................................................................ 171
Control screen/panel......................................... 171
DVD options ........................................................ 174
DVD player and disc............................................ 205

419

LS460_600h_Navi_U

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
E

e-mail .......................................................................... 359
eDestination............................................................... 401
Downloading........................................................ 401
Icons....................................................................... 402
Searching............................................................. 402
Editing route ................................................................ 112
Adding destinations............................................. 112
Adjacent road....................................................... 115
Deleting destinations ......................................... 113
Detour...................................................................... 114
Reordering destinations .................................... 112
Route preference ................................................ 113
Route type .............................................................. 113
“Emergency” ............................................................... 97

Favorites lists........................................................... 350
File (audio) ................................................................... 211
FM ................................................................................... 151
Foot print map ............................................................ 76
Freeway....................................................................... 107
Function index ............................................................ 26

420

LS460_600h_Navi_U

G
General settings ........................................................ 56
GPS (Global Positioning System) ................... 132
Guiding the route .................................... 24, 105, 111

H
Heading-up ................................................................. 77
Home ............................................................ 25, 90, 117

Icon information ........................................................ 83
Incoming call waiting............................................ 358
Incoming calls.......................................................... 355
“Information” screen................................................ 20
Initial screen ................................................................ 30
Internet radio ............................................................. 167
Intersection................................................................ 109
“Intersection & Freeway”....................................... 97
Intuitive parking assist.......................................... 334
Detection range ................................................ 338
Display................................................................... 335
Distance display and buzzer........................ 336
Failure warning .................................................. 340
Information .......................................................... 338
Sensors.................................................................. 334
Switch .................................................................... 334
Intuitive parking assist setting............................. 341
Alert volume ......................................................... 341
Display and tone indication .......................... 342
Parking sonar display........................................ 341
iPod..................................................................... 180, 210
Control screen/panel ...................................... 180
Music....................................................................... 183
Video....................................................................... 183

LEXUS App Suite...................................... 387, 394
Entering keyword............................................. 399
Using...................................................................... 394
Web search ........................................................ 398
LEXUS App Suite settings ................................ 406
LEXUS Enform ...................................................... 382
Before using the function .............................. 386
LEXUS App Suite............................................ 387
LEXUS Enform Destinations ........................... 400
LEXUS Enform Remote.......................... 383, 392
LEXUS Enform Service Connect ....... 383, 393
Lexus Insider............................................................ 403
Viewing and playing........................................ 403
Lexus parking assist monitor .............................. 318
Area displayed on screen.............................. 327
Camera................................................................. 328
Driving precautions........................................... 318
Screen display.................................................... 320
List screen..................................................................... 35
Low fuel warning...................................................... 128

K
Keyboard...................................................................... 34

421

LS460_600h_Navi_U

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
M
Maintenance................................................................ 66
“Map”.............................................................................. 99
Map database ........................................................... 135
microSD card....................................................... 135
Map icons .................................................................... 84
Map screen .......................................................... 72, 75
Adjusting location ................................................ 79
Current position.................................................... 75
Map mode ............................................................... 78
Map scale................................................................. 76
Orientation.............................................................. 77
Scrolling the map.................................................. 78
Map screen information ........................................ 80
Icon information................................................... 83
Map icons ............................................................... 84
Route trace............................................................. 82

422

LS460_600h_Navi_U

MEDIA button.......................................................... 143
Memory point................................................... 96, 120
Memory points settings.......................................... 116
“Address Book” .................................................. 120
Area to avoid ....................................................... 123
Deleting previous destinations..................... 125
Home ........................................................................ 117
“Preset Destinations”.......................................... 118
“Menu” screen.............................................................. 14
Status display .......................................................... 16
Message..................................................................... 359
Calling the message sender......................... 363
Checking............................................................... 361
Receiving.............................................................. 360
Replying ................................................................ 362
microSD card ........................................................... 135
Microphone.............................................................. 298
MMS............................................................................ 359
Mobile Assistant.........................................................311
MP3............................................................ 168, 211, 213

Navigation .................................................................... 72
Navigation options.................................................... 74
North-up........................................................................ 77

Phonebook..................................................... 348, 351
Phone switch/microphone................................. 346
Phone settings ......................................................... 364
“Contacts/Call History” ................................ 366
“Messaging”......................................................... 373
“Notifications”..................................................... 374
“Sounds”............................................................... 365
POI category ........................................... 80, 92, 127
“Point of Interest”....................................................... 92
Predictive traffic data.............................................. 86
Preset destinations................................................... 90
“Previous Destinations” .......................................... 96
Profiles ........................................................................... 43
PRST·TRACK button............................................. 140
PWR·VOL knob............................................... 31, 142

O
Off hook switch ...................................................... 354
Online search................................................. 92, 398
Operating information ........................................ 204
DVD player and disc....................................... 205
Error messages.................................................... 215
File (audio) .............................................................. 211
iPod.......................................................................... 210
Radio ...................................................................... 204
Terms ....................................................................... 213

423

LS460_600h_Navi_U

ALPHABETICAL INDEX
R

Radio ............................................................................... 151, 204
Caching a radio program ............................... 155
Control screen/panel........................................ 151
Preset button screen..........................................154
Presetting a station ............................................ 154
Radio broadcast data system ........................ 157
Selecting a station from the list ..................... 155
Troubleshooting guide..................................... 160
Using HD Radio™ technology..................... 158
RADIO button.......................................................... 143
Radio ID....................................................................... 165
Rear seat audio controls....................................... 196
Rear seat entertainment system........................ 216
Receiving on the Bluetooth® phone............. 355
Incoming calls .................................................... 355
Registering home .............................................. 22, 117
Registering preset destinations.................. 23, 118
Remote Touch ..................................................... 12, 32
Reordering destinations ......................................... 112
Restarting the system................................................ 31
Road preference............................................. 104, 113
Route guidance ....................................................... 100
Route guidance screen......................................... 105
Arrow screen ........................................................ 110
Freeway.................................................................. 107
Intersection ........................................................... 109
Route overview ................................................... 107
Turn list screen...................................................... 110
Route information bar ........................................... 106
Route overview ........................................................ 107
Route preferences ................................................... 113
Route trace.................................................................. 82
Route type ................................................................... 113

Safety Connect ........................................................ 391
Scale ............................................................................... 76
Screen adjustment.................................................... 37
Screen change button...................................... 72, 75
Camera display..................................................... 37
Screen off ..................................................................... 37
Screen off image ....................................................... 59
Screen size................................................................. 148
Scrolling the map ...................................................... 78
Search area ................................................................. 90
Search engine................................................. 92, 398
Sending tones .......................................................... 356
Sensors....................................................................... 334
“Setup” screen............................................................. 18
Side display................................................................ 412
Basic screens ....................................................... 412
Interruption screens.......................................... 414
Single map.................................................................... 78
SMS ............................................................................. 359
“Sound Settings” screen....................................... 146
Startup image ............................................................. 59
Status display ............................................................... 16
Steering switches ......................................... 193, 298

424

LS460_600h_Navi_U

T
Talking on the Bluetooth® phone...................

356
Incoming call waiting....................................... 358
Time zone..................................................................... 58
Traffic information .................................................... 85
Show traffic event information ....................... 85
Show traffic information.................................... 86
Traffic settings .......................................................... 130
Auto avoid traffic.................................................. 131
Transmit volume..................................................... 356
Travel time ................................................................. 105
TUNE·SCROLL knob .......................................... 140
Turn list ....................................................... 78, 103, 110
Turn list screen........................................................... 110

U
USB memory............................................................. 176
Control screen/panel ....................................... 176
USB/AUX port ........................................................ 145

V
“Vehicle”........................................................................ 65
Dealer setting......................................................... 67
Maintenance .......................................................... 66
Voice command system.......................... 298, 347
Casual speech recognization ..................... 305
Command list..................................................... 306
Operation............................................................. 299
Steering switches ............................................. 298
Voice guidance prompts......................................... 111
Voice settings.............................................................. 63

W
Weather ...................................................................... 314
Web search ............................................................. 398
WMA ........................................................ 168, 211, 213

X
XM Satellite Radio.................................................... 161
Control screen/panel......................................... 161
How to subscribe to an
XM Satellite Radio........................................ 163
If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions...... 166
Radio ID.................................................................. 165
Selecting a channel from the list .................. 165

425

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Map database information and updates
This system uses the maps of DENSO.

426

LS460_600h_Navi_U

427

LS460_600h_Navi_U

428

LS460_600h_Navi_U

429

LS460_600h_Navi_U

430

LS460_600h_Navi_U

431

LS460_600h_Navi_U

432

LS460_600h_Navi_U

433

LS460_600h_Navi_U

434

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Certification
U.S.A.
 FCC ID : AJDK086
 This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada iIcence-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
 Information to User - Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate
authorization may invalidate the user's right to operate the equipment.
 Co-location: This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.

Canada
 IC : 775E-K086
 This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada iIcence-exempt RSS
standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et CNR d'lndustrie
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2)
l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.

435

LS460_600h_Navi_U

 Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, “Powered by Gracenote”, MusicID, Playlist
Plus and MediaVOCS are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc.
in the United States and/or other countries

436

LS460_600h_Navi_U

437

LS460_600h_Navi_U

For U.S. owners

438

LS460_600h_Navi_U

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.5
Linearized                      : Yes
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Modify Date                     : 2015:09:28 12:11:40-07:00
Create Date                     : 2015:09:28 12:11:40-07:00
Metadata Date                   : 2015:09:28 12:11:40-07:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:0d6b8f3a-88d8-46c8-9414-c0860840cdc3
Instance ID                     : uuid:1a4c5cd8-aa4b-432d-bda3-8a31ee484d49
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 438

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Lexus OM50E88U

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation